Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 127

SERVICE MANUAL

CODE: 00ZAR5731/S1E

DIGITAL
MULTIFUNCTIONAL
SYSTEM

MODEL AR-5726/5731

CONTENTS

NOTE FOR SERVICING

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

[5] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

[6] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

[7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

[8] MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

[9] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

[10] ELECTRICAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Parts marked with “ ” are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.

This document has been published to be used


for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS

NOTE FOR SERVICING [5] ADJUSTMENTS


1. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 1. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
2. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 2. Details of adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
3. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i [6] SIMULATION
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
1. Line of machines and options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1 2. Simulation code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3
[2] SPECIFICATIONS 3. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 6

1. Basic function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 [7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE

[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS 1. Trouble code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1

1. Supply system table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1 2. Details of trouble code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2

2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2 [8] MAINTENANCE


3. Developer/Drum life end definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3 1. Maintenance list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
4. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3 2. Details of Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 3
5. Environment conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3 3. Other related items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 31
[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE [9] FIRMWARE UPDATE
1. External view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1 1. Firmware update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
2. Internal structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 2 [10] ELECTRICAL SECTION
3. Operation panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 3 1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
4. RSPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
2. Actual wiring chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2
5. Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5 3. Signal list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 9
6. Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5
7. Solenoid/Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6
8. Drive motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 6
9. Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7
10. Fan/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 7
11. PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8
12. Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 8
NOTE FOR SERVICING
This Service Manual uses some photographs to assure safe operation. 2. Precautions for servicing
Please understand the meanings of photographs before servicing.
1) When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, the
WARNING: If this WARNING should be ignored, a serious danger
network cable, and the telephone line from the machine, except
to life or a serious injury may result.
when performing the communication test, etc.
CAUTION: If this CAUTION should be ignored, injury or damage
to property could result. It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
2) There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use extreme
care when servicing.
1. Warning for servicing
3) There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may
1) Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that cause an electric shock . Be careful when servicing.
meets the specified voltage and current requirements. 4) Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective mate-
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric shock. rial such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path.
2) If there is any abnormality such as smoke or an abnormal smell, It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams.
interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug. 5) When servicing the machine while operating, be careful not to
It may cause a fire or an electric shock. make contact with chains, belts, gear, and any other moving parts.
3) Be sure the machine is properly grounded. Failure to ground the 6) Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled.
machine properly may result in an electric shock or fire. Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch inside
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening, ground- the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or an injury.
ing must be made. 7) When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink exces-
4) When connecting the ground wire, never connect it to the following sively. Do not get them in the eyes.
points as it may cause an explosion, fire, or an electric shock: If toner, developer, or ink enters you eyes, wash it away with water
• Gas tube immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary.
• Lightning conductor 8) The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to dam-
• A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a age fingers when servicing.
grounding object by the authorities. 9) Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, toner
• Grounding wire for telephone line may pop and burn you.
5) Do not damage, break, or stress the power cord. Do not put heavy 10) When replacing the lithium battery on the PWB, use only the spec-
objects on the power cord. Do not bend or pull the cord forcefully. It ified battery. If a battery of different specification is used, it may not
may cause a fire or electric shock. be compatible and cause breakdown or malfunction of the
6) Keep the power cable away from a heat source. machine.
Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet. 11) When carrying an electric unit or a PWB, use an anti-static (elec-
tricity) bag. Failure to do so may cause component failure or
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
machine malfunction.
7) Do not put a receptacle with water in it or a metal piece which may
drop inside the machine.
3. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
8) Do not touch the power plug, insert a telephone jack, perform ser- When repairing or replacing, be sure to observe the following items.
vice or operate the machine with wet or oil hands. It may cause an 1) When repairing or replacing the LSU, be sure to disconnect the
electric shock. power plug from the power outlet.
2) When repairing or replacing the LSU, follow the procedures
described in this Service Manual.
3) When checking the operations after repairing the LSU, keep all the
parts including the cover installed and perform the operation
check.
4) Do not modify the LSU.
5) When visually checking the inside of the machine for the operation
check, be careful not to allow laser beams to enter the eyes.
If the above precaution is neglected or an undesignated work is per-
formed, safety may not be assured.

AR-5726/5731 NOTE FOR SERVICING - i


[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
1. Line of machines and options

Document cover Reversing single pass feeder


[MX-VR10] [MX-RP10]

Job separator tray


[MX-TR11]

Staple cartridge
[MX-SCX1]
Finisher
[MX-FN13]

Installation of the
MX-FN13 is required.

Copier/Printer (SPLC) model


[AR-5726/5731]

Exit tray unit


[MX-TE10]

Machine stand Machine stand Paper feed unit Paper feed unit
(Large) (Small) (500 Sheets) (500x2 Sheets)
[MX-DS11] [MX-DS12] [MX-DE10] [MX-DE11]

FAX expantion kit Expantion memory board FAX memory (8MB)

[AR-SM5](256MB)
[AR-FX7] [AR-SM6](512MB) [AR-MM9]

AR-5726/5731 PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 - 1


[2] SPECIFICATIONS (8) Engine speed (ppm)
26-sheet 31-sheet
Tray Paper size
model model
1. Basic function
Tray 1-4 A3 15 17
A. Base engine B4/8.5 x 13 17 20
(1) Type A4/B5/A5/8.5 x 11/ 26 31
Type Desktop 5.5 x 8.5/16K
A4R/8.5 x 11R/16KR 18 24
(2) Engine composition
B5R 21
Photoconductor kind OPC drum (Drum dia. 30mm)
11 x 17 14 17
Copying method Electronic photo (Laser)
8.5 x 14 16 20
Developing system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush
8K 19
development
Manual paper A3 14 17
Charging system Sawtooth charging
feed 8.5 x 13 17 20
Transfer system Transfer roller system
B4 16 19
Cleaning system Contact blade system
A4/B5/A5/8.5 x 11/ 23 27
Fusing system Heat roller
5.5 x 8.5/16K
Toner supply method Toner supply by front cover open
A4R/8.5 x 11R 19 22
Waste toner disposal Toner cartridge collection
16KR 23
(3) Dimensions / Weight B5R 21 24
External dimensions OC model: 623 x 628 x 668mm 11 x 17 14 16
(W x D x H) RSPF model: 623 x 628 x 788mm 8.5 x 14 16 19
Occupied 898 x 628mm
dimensions (W x D) (9) Power source
(when the manual Voltage/Current 220 - 240V 8A
paper feed tray is Frequency 50/60Hz
extended)
Power source code Inlet type
Weight About 46kg
Power switch 1 power source
(4) Warmup (10) Power consumption
Warm-up time 23 sec or less (26-sheet model)
Maximum rated 1.45kw
25 sec or less (31-sheet model)
power consumption
Pre-heat Yes
Shift time to sleep Default (1 minute)
Jam recovery time About 10sec, excluding fusing warmup, toner mode
control, etc.
(11) Memory
Conditions: Leaving for 60 sec after door open, standard conditions,
Local Memory Standard 32MB
polygon stop.
Expansion 512MB x 2
(5) First copy time
Max. 1056MB
26-sheet model 31-sheet model
Platen 4.8 sec 4.5 sec B. Controller board
RSPF 9.3 sec or less (1) Controller board
∗ Measuring conditions: When paper of A4 or 8.5” x 11” is fed from the SPLC board
machine tray, with the polygon rotating. Interface Ethernet No
(6) Engine resolution USB 2.0 Device Full Speed 1slot
Writing resolution 600 x 600dpi Memory No
Smoothing (Print) 1200dpi (equivalent) x 600dpi Memory expansion slot ---
Gradation Writing: Binary
C. Operation panel
(7) Printable range Type Dot matrix LCD, touch panel
Max. print size AB series: 416 x 293mm Size Monochrome H-VGA 8.1”
(600dpi: 9826dot x 6920dot) Display dot number 640 x 240 (H-VGA)
Inch series: 428 x 275mm
LCD drive display area 192 x 72mm
(600dpi: 10110dot x 6496dot)
LCD backlight Fluorescent lamp backlight system
Void area image loss Front/Rear: Less than 4mm
Right/Left total: Less than 6mm at actual LCD contrast adjustment Yes
(100%) size

AR-5726/5731 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 1
D. Scanner section (3) Automatic document feeder
(1) Resolution/Gradation Type RSPF
(Automatic duplex document feeder unit)
Reading Copy mode
resolution Scan speed When in single copy When in duplex copy
Platen 400 x 600dpi
(dpi) Copy 31-sheet model: 31-sheet model:
RSPF 400 x 600dpi 27 sheets/min 13.6 side/min
Transmission FAX transmission mode (400 x 600dpi) (400 x 600dpi)
resolusion Select mode Normal Fine Super Ultra 26-sheet model: 26-sheet model:
(dpi) text text fine fine 26 sheets/min 13.6 side/min
text text (400 x 600dpi) (400 x 600dpi)
Input resolution: 203.2 203.2 203.2 406.4 Fax 40 sheets/min 17 sheets/min
OC x x x x (Normal text, A4R) (Normal text, A4R)
293.4 293.4 391.2 586.7 Document set Face-up reference
Input resolution: 203.2 203.2 203.2 406.4 direction
RSPF x x x x Document standard Center reference
293.4 293.4 391.2 586.7 position
Transmission 203.2 203.2 203.2 406.4 Document transport Sheet through system
resolution x x x x system
97.8 195.6 391 391 Document size AB series: A3 - A5
Half tone No Yes Yes Yes Inch series: 11 x 17 - 5.5 x 8.5
Reading 256 gradations Document weight Single face: 35 - 128g/m2, 9 - 34 lbs,
gradation Duplex: 52 - 105g/m2, 13.9 - 28 lbs
Exposure Electrodeless xenon lamp Max. loading 100 sheets (90g/m2)
lamp capacity of Paper thickness of 13mm or less can be set.
Output Binary documents
gradation Transport disable OHP, perforated documents, photo,
document catalogue, second original sheet, tracing
(2) Document table
paper, carbon paper, heat-sensitive paper,
Type Document table fixed type (Flat bed) wrinkled paper, folded or broken paper,
Scanning area 297 x 431.8mm pasted or cut-away paper, documents of
Original standard Left bottom reference many perforated holes (2-hole, 3-hole
position documents can be used), document printed
by an ink ribbon
Detection Yes
Detection Yes
Detection size Inch Automatic setting
series 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, Detection size Inch Automatic setting
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5 series 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
Manual setting 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 (216 x Manual setting
330), 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 (216 x
5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4, A4R 330), 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R,
5.5 x 8.5, A3, A4, A4R
AB Automatic setting
series A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5 AB Automatic setting
Manual setting series 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, A3, B4, A4,
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 (216 x A4R, B5, B5R, A5
330), 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, A3, B4, Manual setting
A4, A4R, A5 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13 (216 x
330), 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, A3, B4,
A4, A4R, A5
Multi copy S-S, S-D, D-D, D-S
Mixed paper feed Enable (Same width only)

AR-5726/5731 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 2
E. Paper feed section
Type Paper feed tray + Multi manual paper feed (Expanded up to 4 trays by installing options.)
Paper feed method Paper is fed from the above by the front loading system.
Details of paper feed section Tray1 Tray2 Manual paper feed tray
Paper capacity Standard paper 500 sheets 100 sheets
(80g/m2)
Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5R, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, A5,
A5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14 (216 x 356), B6R, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14 (216 x 356),
8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5x11R, 8.5 x 13 (216 x 330), 8.5 x 13 (216 x 330), 8.5 x 11,
5.5 x 8.5, 8K, 16K, 16KR 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 8K, 16KR 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5,
8K, 16K, 16KR, A6R, Envelope*1
Paper size detection No Yes
Allowable paper type and weight for paper 56 - 105g/m2/15 - 28lbs Bond Multi paper feed:
feed Standard paper (56 - 128g/m2)
Special paper, heavy paper (max.
200g/m2)
Single paper feed:
Standard paper, special paper,
second original, heavy paper (max.
200g/m2), 56- 200g/m2 (14 - 54lbs)
Paper type Standard paper (56 - 80g/m2) • Standard paper: 100 sheets
Normal paper (60 - 105g/m2) (56 - 80g/m2)
Letterhead • Recycled paper/coarse paper:
Color paper 100 sheets
• Heavy paper (max. 200g/m2):
30 sheets
• OHP/Label sheet/gift wrapping
paper: 40 sheets
• Label sheet: 40 sheets
• Envelope (AB series: 10 sheets,
Inch series: 5 sheets)
Paper size setting when Inch series 8.5 x 11 ---
shipping AB series A4 ---
Paper remaining detection No (paper presence only)
∗ 1: Supported envelope kinds: Commercial10 (4 - 1/8” x 9 - 1/2”), International DL (110mm x 220mm), International C5 (162mm x 229mm)

AR-5726/5731 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 3
F. Paper exit section H. Printer function
(1) Center tray of main unit (1) Platform
Paper exit position/ Main unit top surface face-down paper • IBM PC/AT
system exit • Macintosh
Paper exit capacity 500 sheets (A4, 8.5 x 11, 80g/m2 paper)
(2) Support OS
Paper exit paper size/ All kinds of paper which can be fed
kind OS SPLC

Shifter function Yes Windows 2000

Paper remaining Yes XP Yes


detection for paper exit XP x64
Server 2003
G. Copy functions No
Server 2003 x64
(1) Copy magnification ratio Vista
Copy AB 25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%, Yes
Vista x64
magnification series 115%, 122%, 141%, 200%, 400%
Server 2008
ratio Inch 25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%,
Server 2008 x64
series 129%, 200%, 400%
Mac 9.0 - 9.2.2
Zoom 25 - 400%
(Restriction by the document feeder unit: 50 - 200%) X 10.2.8 No
X 10.3.9
(2) Density/copy image quality process
X 10.4.11
Exposure mode Binary: Automatic, Text, Text/Photo, Photo
X 10.5 - 10.5.6
Number of manual 5 steps
steps
I. Environmental conditions
(3) Duplex (Humidity)
System Switchback system
85%
Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11 x 17,
8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R 60%
Type and weight of 56 - 105g/m2/15 - 21.3 lbs Bond
paper which can be Duplex print from manual paper feed can be
passed made. (Except for heavy paper, OHP sheet,
and other special paper)
20%
∗ When duplex printing is continued in a certain level of temperature,
the printing speed may be reduced in order to prevent an abnormal
10 C 30 C 35 C
temperature rise in the machine.
(Temperature)
(4) Copy functions
Automatic paper selection Standard environmental Temperature 20 - 25°C
Automatic magnification ratio selection conditions Humidity 65 ± 5%RH
Vertical/horizontal independent magnification ratio Usage environmental Temperature 10 - 35°C
conditions Humidity 20 - 85%RH
Paper type selection
Atmospheric 590 - 1013 hPa
Auto tray switching
pressure (height: 0 - 2000m)
Rotation copy
Electronic sort
Job reservation (only during warm-up)
Program call-out/registration (10 items)
Preheat function
Auto power shut off function
User management (100 items)
Mixed documents feed (MIX only)
Binding margin (Left/Right/Upper)
Edge erase/Center erase (Center/Edge/Center + Edge)
1 set 2 copy
Cover paper/Insert paper (Cover/Back cover only)
Multi shot (2 in 1/4 in 1) (Centering available)
Card shot (Centering available)
Pamphlet mode (Centering available)
Duplex copy direction switching
Large volume document mode
Black/white reverse (except for UK)
Stream feeding mode (ON/OFF switch by the system setting)

AR-5726/5731 SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 4
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Supply system table
A. East Europe/Russia
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks
1 Toner cartridge Toner cartridge (With IC chip) ×1 33K MX-312GT Life setting by A4 (8.5"×11") 6% document
(black) (Toner; Net 700g) Default: Toner save mode
2 Developer (black) Developer ×1 26cpm: 75K MX-312GV
(Developer; Net 300g) 31cpm: 100K
3 Drum Drum ×1 26cpm: 75K MX-312GR
31cpm: 100K

B. Asia Subsidiaries
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks
1 Toner cartridge Toner cartridge (With IC chip) ×1 33K MX-312AT Life setting by A4 (8.5"×11") 6% document
(black) (Toner; Net 700g) Default: Toner save mode
2 Developer (black) Developer ×1 26cpm: 75K MX-312AV
(Developer; Net 300g) 31cpm: 100K
3 Drum Drum ×1 26cpm: 75K MX-312AR
31cpm: 100K

C. SMEF/Agent
No. Item Content Life Model name Remarks
1 Toner cartridge Toner cartridge (With IC chip) ×1 33K MX-312FT Life setting by A4 (8.5"×11") 6% document
(black) (Toner; Net 700g) Default: Toner save mode
2 Developer (black) Developer ×1 26cpm: 75K MX-312FV
(Developer; Net 300g) 31cpm: 100K
3 Drum Drum ×1 26cpm: 75K MX-312FR
31cpm: 100K

AR-5726/5731 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 1


2. Maintenance parts list
A. East Europe/Russia/SMEF
Model
No. Item Content Life Remarks
name
1 Upper heat roller kit Upper heat roller ×1 150K AR-310UH
Fuser gear ×1
Upper heat roller bearing ×2
Upper cleaning pad ×1
Fusing separation pawl (upper) ×4
Thermistor cleaning pad ×2
2 Lower heat roller kit Lower heat roller ×1 300K MX-311LH
Fusing separation pawl (lower) ×4
Fuser bearing (lower) ×2
3 150K PM kit Drum separation pawl unit ×2 150K MX-311KA
Transfer roller unit ×1
DV blade ×1
DV side sheet F ×1
DV side sheet R ×1
Toner filter unit ×1
4 MC unit MC unit ×10 26cpm: 75K (×10) MX-311MC
31cpm: 100K (×10)
5 Cleaner blade Cleaner blade ×10 26cpm: 75K (×10) MX-311CB
31cpm: 100K (×10)
6 Drum frame unit Drum frame unit ×1 26cpm: 225K MX-311DU ∗ The life of the toner reception seat attached to
31cpm: 300K the drum frame is 300K, and it can be used up
to 3 times. (Supplied as a drum frame unit.)
7 Transfer roller unit Transfer roller unit ×1 150K MX-311TX
8 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge ×3 5000 staples ×3 MX-SCX1
∗ The other maintenance parts than the above are supplied as service parts.

B. Asia Subsidiaries/Agent
Model
No. Item Content Life Remarks
name
1 Upper heat roller kit Upper heat roller ×1 150K AR-310UH
Fuser gear ×1
Upper heat roller bearing ×2
Upper cleaning pad ×1
Fusing separation pawl (upper) ×4
Thermistor cleaning pad ×2
2 Lower heat roller kit Lower heat roller ×1 300K MX-311LH
Fusing separation pawl (lower) ×4
Fuser bearing (lower) ×2
3 150K PM kit Drum separation pawl unit ×2 150K MX-311KA
Transfer roller unit ×1
DV blade ×1
DV side sheet F ×1
DV side sheet R ×1
Toner filter unit ×1
4 MC unit MC unit ×10 26cpm: 75K (×10) MX-311MC
31cpm: 100K (×10)
5 Cleaner blade Cleaner blade ×10 26cpm: 75K (×10) MX-311CB
31cpm: 100K (×10)
6 Drum frame unit Drum frame unit ×1 26cpm: 225K MX-311DU ∗ The life of the toner reception seat attached to
31cpm: 300K the drum frame is 300K, and it can be used up
to 3 times. (Supplied as a drum frame unit.)
7 Staple cartridge Staple cartridge ×3 5000 staples ×3 MX-SCX1
∗ The other maintenance parts than the above are supplied as service parts.

AR-5726/5731 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 2


3. Developer/Drum life end definition
When the developer/drum counter reaches the specified level.
When the developer/drum rpm reaches the specified level.
When either of the above reached the specified level, it is judged as life end.
In an actual case, when correction or warm-up operation is performed as well as output operation, the developer and the drum rotates.
Therefore, the developer/drum consuming level cannot be determined only by the copy/print quantity. When, therefore, the rpm reaches the specified
level, it is judged as life end.
To check the drum and developer life, use SIM22-1.

Number of rotations
Developer/drum counter
(Rotations)
Developer/drum 26cpm model 31cpm model 550K
75K 100K

4. Production number identification


<Toner cartridge> <Drum>
The label on the toner cartridge shows the date of production. The laser print indicates the model conformity code and the date (year,
month, day) of production.

Label position

Internal product name


Incompatibility 1 2 3 4 5
Destination 1 Alphabet
Indicates the model conformity code. L for this model.
2 Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
Version No. 3 Number or X, Y, Z
Production year/month/day (6 digits) Indicates the month of packing.
Serial No. in production day (5 digits) X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
Production place (1 digits) 4, 5 Number
Indicates the day of the month of packing.
<Developer>
5. Environment conditions
(Humidity)

85%

60%

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
20%
The lot number is of 8 digits. Each digit indicates the content as follows.
The number is printed on the right under side of the back surface of the 10 C 30 C 35 C
developer bag.
(Temperature)
1 Alphabet
Indicates the production factory. Standard environmental Temperature 20 - 25°C
2 Number conditions Humidity 65 ± 5%RH
Indicates the production year. Usage environmental Temperature 10 - 35°C
3, 4 Number conditions Humidity 20 - 85%RH
Indicates the production month. Atmospheric 590 - 1013 hPa
5, 6 Number pressure (height: 0 - 2000m)
Indicates the production day. Storage period Toner/Developer: 24 months from the
7 Hyphen manufactured month (Production lot)
under unsealed state
8 Number
Drum: 36 months from the manufactured
Indicates the production lot.
month under unsealed state

AR-5726/5731 CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 3


[4] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
1. External view

1 2 3 6

16
4
8 5
12

11
9 17

13 19

10 14 20
18
21

15

No. Name Function/Operation


1 Document feeder tray Place the original(s) that you wish to scan face up here.
2 Original guides Adjust to the size of the originals.
3 Document feeder cover Open to remove misfed originals.
4 Reversing tray Pull out to remove misfed originals.
5 Exit area Originals exit the machine here after copying.
6 Document transport cover Open to remove misfed originals.
7 Document transport cover knob Pull to open the document transport cover.
8 Document glass Place an original that you wish to scan face down here.
9 Power switch Press to turn the machine power on and off.
10 Handles Use to move the machine.
11 Operation panel Contains operation keys and the touch panel.
12 Job separator tray (Upper tray) (optional) Print jobs and received faxes are delivered to this tray.
13 Center tray Finished copies are delivered to the center tray.
14 Front cover Open to remove paper misfeeds and perform machine maintenance.
15 Paper trays Each tray holds 500 sheets of copy paper.
16 Upper right side cover Open to remove misfeeds when an optional job separator tray kit or a optional finisher is
installed.
17 Side cover Open to remove misfeeds.
18 Side cover handle Pull to open the side cover.
19 Bypass tray paper guides Adjust to the width of the paper.
20 Bypass tray Regular paper and special paper (such as transparency film) can be fed from the bypass tray.
21 Bypass tray extension Pull out the bypass tray extension before placing paper in the bypass tray.

AR-5726/5731 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 - 1


2. Internal structure

6
2

4
5

No. Name Function/Operation Note


1 Toner cartridge lock release lever Use to unlock the toner cartridge.
2 Toner cartridge Contains toner.
3 Roller rotating knob Turn to remove misfed paper.
4 Photoconductive drum Copy images are formed on the photoconductive drum. Do not touch the photoconductive
drum (green portion). Doing so
may damage the drum and cause
smudges on copies.
5 Fusing unit release levers To remove a paper misfeed in the fusing unit, push up on these The fusing unit is hot.
levers and remove the paper. Do not touch the fusing unit when
removing misfed paper.
Doing so may cause a burn or
injury.
6 Fusing unit paper guide Open to remove misfed paper.

AR-5726/5731 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 - 2


3. Operation panel

COPY

ON LINE
PRINT
DATA

LINE
FAX
DATA
JOB STATUS SYSTEM SETTINGS

LOGOUT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

No. Name Function/Operation Note


1 Touch panel The machine status, messages and touch keys are displayed on the panel.
The display will show the status of printing, copying or network scanning
according to the mode that is selected. For details see the next page.
2 Mode select keys and indicators Use to change modes and the corresponding display on the touch panel.
[COPY] key Press to select copy mode.
[PRINT] key/ONLINE indicator/ [PRINT] key: Press to select print mode.
DATA indicator • ONLINE indicator: Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
• DATA indicator: A print job is in memory. The indicator lights steadily while
the job is held in memory, and blinks while the job is printed.
[FAX] key/LINE indicator/ [FAX] key: Press to select fax mode when the fax option is installed. When the fax option is
DATA indicator • LINE indicator : This lights up while faxes are being sent or received. installed.
• DATA indicator: Blinks when a fax has been received to memory and lights
steadily when a fax is waiting in memory for transmission.
3 [JOB STATUS] key Press to display the current job status.
4 [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key Use to adjust various settings of the machine including the contrast of the touch
panel and administrator settings.
5 Numeric keys Use to enter numeric values for various settings.
6 [LOGOUT] key ( ) When auditing mode is enabled, press this key after finishing a job to return the
machine to account number entry standby.
7 [#/P] key ( ) Use this key to execute a job program in copy mode.
The key is also used to dial in fax mode.
8 [CLEAR] key ( ) Press to clear a copy number setting or cancel a job.
9 [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) Resets the settings to the initial settings.
10 [START] key ( ) Press in copy mode, scanner mode, or fax mode to begin copying, network
scanning, or faxing.
This key blinks when auto power shut mode has activated. Press the key to
return to normal operation.
11 [INTERRUPT] key ( ) Use to perform an interrupt copy job.

AR-5726/5731 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 - 3


4. RSPF
A. External view
1
2
3

5
4

No. Name
1 Document set tray
2 Document guide
3 Document feed section cover
4 Document transport section cover
5 Document exit section

B. Internal structure

11
10
9
8
7
3
5
6

14 4
12 13
1
2

No. Code Name Type Function/Operation


1 EMPS Document set sensor Photo transmission Detects presence of documents.
2 FGOD Open/close sensor Photo transmission Detects open/close of the paper feed unit.
3 DFCL Paper feed clutch — —
4 DFD Paper entry sensor Photo transmission Detects presence of documents.
5 RSOL Pressure release solenoid — —
6 CLH Transport clutch — —
7 DTM SPF motor Stepping motor Drives document feed on the tray, transport, and paper exit roller.
8 GSOL Gate solenoid — —
9 — Interface PWB — —
10 DLS1 Document length detection SW (Short) Photo transmission Detects the document length on the tray.
11 DLS2 Document length detection SW (Long) Photo transmission Detects the document length on the tray.
12 OPCLS Book sensor Photo transmission Detects the SPF float.
13 RDD Paper exit sensor Photo transmission Detects presence of documents.
14 SWD Document width sensor Volume Detects the document width on the tray.

AR-5726/5731 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 - 4


5. Sensor No. Name Code Function and operation
18 2nd tray paper upper LUD2 2nd tray paper upper limit
1 limit detection sensor detection
2 19 2nd tray paper empty PED2 2nd tray paper empty
sensor detection
3
25 4 20 1st tray paper pass PPD1H 1st tray paper pass
5 sensor
21 1st tray paper upper LUD1 1st tray paper upper limit
limit detection sensor detection
6 22 1st tray paper empty PED1 1st tray paper empty
sensor detection
7
23 Toner sensor Toner density detection
8 24 Center tray paper LOEMP Center tray paper YES/NO
YES/NO sensor detection
25 Document size sensor DSIN0 Document size detection
(Inch series: PD1, 2)
9 (AB series: PD1 – 3)
26 Reverse pass paper DUP2 Reverse pass detection
10 detection sensor
11
24
23
6. Switch
12
22
21 13
20

19
18
17
26 16 15 14
1
No. Name Code Function and operation
1 Mirror home position MHPS Mirror (scanner) home
sensor position detection
2 Document cover OCSW Document cover open/close
sensor detection 4
3 Document size DSIN3 Document size detection
sensor (Inch series: PD3, 4)
(AB series: PD4, 5)
4 2nd paper exit sensor POD2 2nd paper exit detection
(Option)
5 2nd paper exit full TOPF 2nd paper exit section full
detection sensor detection
(Option)
6 1st paper exit sensor POD1 1st paper exit detection
7 Shifter home position SFTHP Shifter home position sensor
sensor (Except North detection
America)
8 Paper exit sensor PPD2 Paper exit detection
3 2
(DUP side)
9 Thermistor Fusing temperature No. Name Code Function and operation
detection 1 Right cabinet door DSWR0 Right cabinet door open/
10 1st tray (paper tray) CD1 1st tray (paper tray) empty switch (Option) close detection
detection detection 2 Door switch DSWR1 Front door and side door
11 Manual feed paper PPD1L Sensor of paper entry from open/close detection
entry sensor the manual paper feed tray, 3 2nd right door switch DSWR2 Side door open/close
the 2nd/multi-tray desk, or detection
the DUP 4 Main switch PSSW Main power switch
12 Manual paper feed MPLS2 Manual feed tray position
tray empty sensor 2 detection
13 Manual paper feed MPLS1 Manual feed tray position
tray empty sensor 1 detection
14 Manual feed length MPLD1 Manual feed paper length
detection sensor 1 detection
15 Manual feed length MPLD2 Manual feed paper length
detection sensor 2 detection
16 Manual feed paper MPED Manual feed paper empty
empty sensor detection
17 2nd tray paper pass PFD2 2nd tray paper pass
sensor

AR-5726/5731 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 - 5


7. Solenoid/Clutch 8. Drive motor

2
1
4

6
2
3

4
5

9
8
7 6 8 7

No. Name Code Function and operation No. Name Code Function and operation
1 Paper exit gate OGS Paper exit gate switcher 1 Mirror motor MIRM Optical mirror base drive
switching solenoid 2 Shifter motor SFTM Shifter drive
(Option) (Except North
2 PS clutch RRC Main unit paper feed America)
3 Paper feed clutch CPFS1 Paper feed roller drive 4 Duplex motor DPXM Duplex paper switching
4 Manual paper feed MPFS Manual paper feed and exit motor
solenoid solenoid 5 DUP-2 motor Reverse pass for paper
5 Paper feed transfer TRC2 Paper feed transfer clutch transport
clutch 6 Main motor MM Main drive
6 2nd tray paper feed CPFS2 7 Tray lift-up motor LUM1 Tray paper lift-up
clutch 8 Tray lift-up motor LUM2 Tray paper lift-up
7 2nd tray paper feed CPFC2 Solenoid for the paper feed 9 Toner motor TM Toner supply
solenoid from the tray
8 Paper feed solenoid CPFC1 Solenoid for the paper feed
from the tray
9 Separation pawl PSPS Separation pawl operation
solenoid solenoid

AR-5726/5731 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 - 6


9. Lamp 10. Fan/Filter

6
7
2 1
3 5
6
1
4

No. Name Function and operation No. Name Code Function and operation
1 Copy lamp Image radiation lamp 1 Cooling fan VFM Cools the inside of the unit.
2 Heater lamp Fusing heat lamp 2 Exhaust fan motor DCFM Cools the inside of the unit.
3 Intake fan motor DCFM2 Cools the inside of the unit.
4 Fusing paper exit fan VFM2 Cools the inside of the unit.
(31 sheet model)
5 Fusing paper exit fan VFM2 Cools the inside of the unit.
6 Ozon filter
7 Ozon filter

AR-5726/5731 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 - 7


11. PWB 12. Roller
1
2 1

2
3
12

3
11 4

4 5
10 6
7
8
5

6
9
10
11
12

8
14 13
9
No. Name Function and operation
7 1 Paper exit roller Paper exit roller
2 Transport roller Paper transport roller
No. Name Function and operation 3 Upper heat roller Fuses toner on paper.
1 Inverter PWB Copy lamp control (with the Teflon roller)
2 CCD PWB For image scanning (read) 4 Lower heat roller Fuses toner on paper.
3 Option connector PWB (with the silicone rubber roller)
4 IMC PWB Image process 5 DUP transport follower Duplex paper transport
5 MCU PWB Main unit control roller
6 Mother board Connection with FAX PWB 6 DUP transport roller Duplex paper transport
7 Tray interface PWB 2nd tray control 7 Transport roller Transfer images on the drum onto
8 DC power supply PWB DC voltage control paper.
9 High voltage PWB High voltage control 8 Resist roller Synchronize the paper lead edge
10 KEY PWB with the image lead edge.
11 OPU PWB Operation panel control 9 Manual paper feed roller Picks up papers in manual paper
12 SPLC PWB Output image signal feed port.
10 Manual feed transport Transports paper from the manual
roller paper feed port.
11 1st tray pick-up roller Picks up paper from the tray.
12 1st tray paper feed roller Transports the picked up paper to
RESIST section.
13 2nd tray pick-up roller Picks up paper from the tray.
14 2nd tray paper feed roller Transports the picked up paper to
RESIST section.

AR-5726/5731 EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 4 - 8


[5] ADJUSTMENTS
1. Adjustment item list
Section Adjustment item Adjustment procedure/SIM No.
A Process section (1) Developing doctor gap adjustment Developing doctor gap adjustment
(2) MG roller main pole position adjustment MG roller main pole position adjustment
(3) Developing bias voltage adjustment SIM8-1
(4) Grid bias voltage adjustment SIM8-2
B Mechanism section (1) Print start position adjustment SIM50-5
(2) RSPF image lead edge position adjustment SIM50-6
(3) Rear edge void adjustment SIM50-1
(4) Paper off center adjustment SIM50-10
(5) Left edge void area adjustment SIM50-1-8
(6) Main scanning direction (FR direction) distortion No. 2/3 mirror base unit installing position
balance adjustment adjustment
Copy lamp unit installing position adjustment
(7) Sub scanning direction (scanning direction) Winding pulley position adjustment
distortion adjustment
(8) Main scanning direction (FR direction) distortion Rail height adjustment
balance adjustment
(9) Main scanning direction (FR direction) SIM48-1-1
magnification ratio adjustment
(10) Sub scanning direction (scanning direction) a OC mode in copying (SIM 48-1-2)
magnification ratio adjustment b RSPF sub scanning direction magnification ratio
(SIM48-1-3, 48-1-4)
(11) Off center adjustment (RSPF mode) SIM50-12
(12) OC (RSPF) open/close detection position SIM41-3
adjustment
(13) Original sensor adjustment SIM41-2, 41-4 (41-1)
(14) RSPF white correction pixel position adjustment SIM63-7
(required in an RSPF model when replacing the
lens unit)
(15) RSPF scan position auto adjustment SIM53-8
C Image density (1) Copy mode SIM46-2
(exposure) adjustment

2. Details of adjustment
A. Process section 2) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw A.
3) Insert a thickness gauge of 1.5mm to the positions of three screws
(1) Developing doctor gap adjustment
on the developing docter as shown.
1) Remove the doctor cover.

R
A

C
A

F
A

4) Tighten the developing doctor fixing screw.


5) Check the clearance of the developing doctor. If it is within the
specified range, then fix the doctor fixing screw with screw lock.
∗ When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the
developing doctor and the MG roller.
<Adjustment specification>
Developing doctor gap
+0.1mm
F/C/R: 1.5 -0.15mm

AR-5726/5731 ADJUSTMENTS 5 - 1
(2) MG roller main pole position adjustment (4) Grid bias voltage adjustment (SIM 8-2)
1) Put the developing unit on a flat surface. 1) Execute SIM 8-2.
2) Tie a needle or pin on a string.
3) Hold the string and bring the needle close to the MG roller horizon- SIMULATION 8-2

tally. (Do not use paper clip, which is too heavy to make a correct
adjustment.) (Put the developing unit horizontally for this adjust-
ment.)
4) Do not bring the needle into contact with the MG roller, but bring it
to a position 2 or 3mm apart from the MG roller. Mark the point on
the MG roller which is on the extension line from the needle tip.
5) Measure the distance from the marking position to the top of the
doctor plate of the developing unit to insure that it is 9.1mm.
If the distance is not within the specified range, loosen the fixing 2) Touch the exposure mode to be changed.
screw A of the main pole adjustment plate, and move the adjust- The current set value is displayed.
ment plate in the arrow direction to adjust. 3) Enter the set value with the 10-key.
4) Press the [START] key.
Output is made with the entered value for 30sec, and the display
returns to the original state.
<Adjustment specification>
Setting
Item Content Default
A range
1 AE (145) AE (145mm/s) 590
9.1mm
Character
2 TEXT (145) 590
(145mm/s)
TEXT/PHOTO Character/Photo
3 590
(145) (145mm/s)
4 PHOTO (145) Photo (145mm/s) 590
(3) Developing bias voltage adjustment (SIM 8-1)
TONER SAVE Toner save
1) Execute SIM 8-1. 5 540
(145) (145mm/s) 350-
6 AE (122) AE (122mm/s) 750 590
SIMULATION 8-1
SIMULATION 8-1
DV BIAS COPY SETTING. INPUT VALUE 200-550, AND PRESS Character
START. 7 TEXT (122) 590
(122mm/s)
1: AE 426 426
2: TEXT 450 1/1 TEXT/PHOTO Character/Photo
8 590
3: TEXT/PHOTO 450 (122) (122mm/s)
4: PHOTO 450
5: SUPER/PHOTO 400
9 PHOTO (122) Photo (122mm/s) 590
6: TONER SAVE 376 TONER SAVE Toner save
10 540
(122) (122mm/s)
2) Touch the exposure mode to be changed. Min. unit: –10V increment
The current set value is displayed.
3) Enter the set value with the 10-key.
B. Mechanism section
4) Press the [START] key. (1) Print start position adjustment
Output is made with the entered value, and the display returns to 1) Execute SIM 50-5.
the original state.
SIMULATION 50-5
<Adjustment specification> LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT(PRINT). INPUT VALUE 0-99, AND PRESS
Setting START.
Item Content Default 1: TRAY1 53 53
range
2: OPTION 53 1/1
1 AE (145) AE (145mm/s) 450 3: MANUAL 53
Character 4: DUPLEX 53
2 TEXT (145) 450
(145mm/s)
TEXT/PHOTO Character/Photo
3 450
(145) (145mm/s)
4 PHOTO (145) Photo (145mm/s) 450 2) Touch the item to be adjusted.
TONER SAVE Toner save The item and the currently set value are highlighted.
5 400
(145) (145mm/s) 200- 3) Press the [P] key.
6 AE (122) AE (122mm/s) 650 450 The display is shifted to the copy menu.
Character 4) Select the paper feed tray, the print density, and the duplex mode.
7 TEXT (122) 450
(122mm/s) Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.
TEXT/PHOTO Character/Photo 5) Press the [START] key.
8 450
(122) (122mm/s) Copying is started.
9 PHOTO (122) Photo (122mm/s) 450
TONER SAVE Toner save
10 400
(122) (122mm/s)

Min. unit: –10V increment

AR-5726/5731 ADJUSTMENTS 5 - 2
Item Content Setting range Default (2) RSPF image lead edge position adjustment
1 TRAY1 1st tray 0-99 1) Set a scale on the OC table as shown below.
2 OPTION Option tray
53
3 MANUAL Manual feed 1-99
4 DUPLEX Back print
6) Measure the distance H between the paper lead edge and the
image print start position. Set the image print start position set
value again.
• 1 step of the set value corresponds to about 0.127mm shift.
• Calculate the set value from the formula below.
99 – H/0.127 (mm) = Image print start position set value
<H: Print start position measurement value (mm)> Note: Since the printed copy is used as a test chart, put the scale in
paralleled with the edge lines.
0mm 2) Make a copy, then use the copy output as an original to make an
RSPF copy again.
0mm 3) Check the copy output. If necessary, perform the following adjust-
5
ment procedures.
4) Execute SIM 50-6.
10
5) Set the RSPF lead edge position set value so that the same image
is obtained as that obtained in the previous OC image lead edge
position adjustment.
<Adjustment specification>
Adjustment Setting
∗ Fit the print edge with the paper edge, and perform the lead SIM Set value Spec value
mode range
edge adjustment.
RSPF 50-6 1 step: Lead edge void:
Example:99 – 5/0.127 = 99 – 39.4 = about 59
image lead 0.127mm 1 – 4mm
Note: FIf the set value is not obtained from the above formula, per- 1 – 99
edge shift Image loss: 3mm or less
form the fine adjustment. position
7) Execute SIM 50-1-2 to adjust the main tray lead edge void.
(3) Rear edge void adjustment
• 1 step of the set value corresponds to about 0.127mm shift.
1) Set a scale as shown in the figure below.
• Calculate the set value from the formula below.
A4 (8.5" x 11")
B/0.127 (mm) = Lead edge void adjustment value
<B: Lead edge void (mm)>

2.5mm

5
2.5mm

10

Paper rear edge

2) Set the document size to A4 (8.5" x 11"), and make a copy at


Example: When setting the lead edge void to 2.5mm: 100%.
2.5 /0.127 = about 20 3) If an adjustment is required, follow the procedures below.
<Adjustment specification> Void amount (Standard value: 4mm or less)
Adjustment Setting
SIM Set value Spec value
mode range
Main tray lead 50-1 B/0.127 Lead edge void:
edge void -2 1 – 4mm Scale image
1 – 99
Print start 50-5 99 – H/0.127 Image loss: 3mm
or less Paper rear edge
position
[H: Print start position measurement value (mm),
B: Lead edge void (mm)]
4) Execute SIM 50-1 and set the density mode to DEN-B. The cur-
rently set adjustment value is displayed.
5) Enter the set value and press the start key.
The correction value is stored and a copy is made.
<Adjustment specification>
Adjustment Spec Setting
SIM Set value
mode value range
Rear edge 1 step: 0.127mm 4mm or 1 – 99
50-1-6
void shift less

AR-5726/5731 ADJUSTMENTS 5 - 3
(4) Paper off center adjustment (5) Left edge void area adjustment
1) Set a test chart (UKOG-0089CSZZ) on the document table. Note: Before performing this adjustment, be sure to check that the
2) Select a paper feed port and make a copy. paper off center adjustment (SIM 50-10) is completed.
3) Execute SIM 50-10. 1) Execute SIM 50-1.
SIMULATION 50-1
SIMULATION 50-10
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 1-99, AND PRESS START.
PRINT OFF-CENTER ADJUSTMENT. INPUT VALUE 1-99, AND
1: RRC-A 43 2: DEN-A 18 43
PRESS START.
3: DEN-A -MANUAL 18 4: DEN-A -OPTION 18
1: BYPASS 50 50
5: DEN-A -DUPLEX 18 6: DEN-B 3 1/1
2: TRAY1 50 1/1
7: DEN-B-DUP 50 8: SIDE VOID 18
3: TRAY2 50
9: SIDE VOID-DUP 18 10: LOSS(OC) 3
4: TRAY3 50
5: TRAY4 50
6: DUPLEX 50 OK
OK

2) Note down the adjustment value of SIM 50-5 (Items 1, 2, 3, 4), and
4) Touch the item to be adjusted. change the value to 99.
The item and the currently set value are highlighted. 3) Set SIM 50-1 (Items 2, 3, 4, 5) to 1. (By setting to 1, there is no
5) Press the [START] key. void.)
The display is shifted to the copy menu. 4) Place a chart with a clear lead edge (or a ruler) on the OC docu-
6) Select the paper feed tray and the print density. ment table.
Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key. 5) Use SIM 50-1 (Item 1) to execute test print. Check the print out and
7) Press the [START] key. adjust so that the lead edge image is printed. (1 – 99: About
Copying is started. 0.127mm/Step)
Item Content Setting range Default 6) Reset the adjustment values of SIM 50-5 (Items 1, 2, 3, 4) to the
original values, and execute test print. Check the print out and
1 BYPASS Manual paper feed
adjust so that the lead edge image is printed on the lead edge of
2 TRAY1 1st tray
paper. (1 – 99: About 0.127mm/Step).
3 TRAY2 2nd tray
1-99 50 7) Adjust SIM 50-1 (Items 2, 3, 4, 5) so that the lead edge void on the
4 TRAY3 3rd tray
print out is the specified value. (1 – 99: About 0.127mm/Step)
5 TRAY4 4th tray
8) Similar to procedure 7, adjust SIM 50-1 (Item 6, 7) so that the rear
6 DUPLEX Back print
edge void is the specified value. (1 – 99: About 0.127mm/Step)
<Adjustment specification> 9) Similar to procedure 7, adjust SIM 50-1 (Item 8, 9) so that the left
Adjustment Setting edge void is the specified value. (1 – 99: About 0.127mm/Step)
SIM Set value Spec value
mode range 10) Make an enlargement copy (400%), and check that there is no
Paper off 50-10 Add 1: 0.127mm Single: shade of the cabinet printed at the lead edge.
center -2 shift to R side. Center 11) If there is a shade printed at the lead edge in procedure 9, adjust
Reduce 1: ±2.0mm SIM 50-1 (Item 10). (1 – 5: About 0.677mm)
1 – 99
Second 50-10 0.127mm shift to L Duplex: * If there is no problem, set to 3.
print surface -6 side. Center
Setting
off-center ±2.5mm Item Content Default
range
1 RRC-A Original scan start position 1-99 43
adjustment
Lead edge position
adjustment value (OC)
2 DEN-A Lead edge cancel 1-99 18
adjustment (Main tray)
3 DEN-A-MANUAL Lead edge cancel 1-99 18
adjustment
(Manual feed tray)
4 DEN-A-OPTION Lead edge cancel 1-99 18
adjustment (Option tray)
5 DEN-A-DUPLEX Lead edge cancel 1-99 18
adjustment
(back of the machine)
6 DEN-B Rear edge void adjustment 1-99 30
7 DEN-B-DUP Rear edge void adjustment 1-99 50
(Duplex)
8 SIDE VOID Left edge void adjustment 1-99 18
(First print surface)
9 SIDE VOID-DUP Left edge void adjustment 1-99 18
(Duplex)
10 LOSS(OC) Image loss amount 1-5 3
adjustment (Lead edge
image loss set value) (OC)
<Adjustment specification>
Adjustment Spec Setting
SIM Set value
mode value range
Left edge void 50-1 1 step: 0.127mm 0.5 – 4mm 1 – 99
-8 shift

AR-5726/5731 ADJUSTMENTS 5 - 4
(6) Main scanning direction (FR direction) distortion 5) Without moving the scanner drive pulley shaft, manually turn the
balance adjustment scanner drive pulley until the positioning plate is brought into con-
tact with No. 2/3 mirror base unit, then fix the scanner drive pulley.
1) Remove the OC glass, the right cabinet and the upper right side
cover.
1

3 1
1
1 2

4
6) Put No. 2/3 mirror base unit on the positioning plate again, push
4
the projections on the front frame side and the rear frame side of
the copy lamp unit to the corner frame, and tighten the wire fixing
2) Loosen the copy lamp unit wire fixing screw. screw.

Wire fixing screw

3) Manually turn the mirror base drive pulley and bring No. 2/3 mirror
base unit into contact with the positioning plate.
At that time, if the front frame side and the rear frame side of No. 2/
3 mirror base unit are brought into contact with the positioning
plate at the same time, the mirror base unit parallelism is proper.
If one of them is in contact with the positioning plate, perform the
adjustment of 4).

(7) Sub scanning direction (scanning direction) distortion


adjustment (Winding pulley position adjustment)
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
• When the mirror base drive wire is replaced.
• When the lamp unit, or No. 2/3 mirror holder is replaced.
• When a copy as shown is made.

La Lb

Paper exit
direction
Original Copy

4) Loosen the set screw of the scanner drive pulley which is not in
contact with No. 2/3 mirror base unit positioning plate.

AR-5726/5731 ADJUSTMENTS 5 - 5
1) Set A3 (11" x 17") white paper on the original table as shown <Adjustment specification>
below. La = Lb
6) Execute the main scanning direction (FR) distortion balance
adjustment previously described in 2) again.
(8) Main scanning direction (FR direction) distortion
balance adjustment (Rail height adjustment)
When there is no skew copy in the mirror base scanning direction and
there is no horizontal error (right angle to the scanning direction), the
adjustment can be made by adjusting the No. 2/3 mirror base unit rail
height.
Place a little clearance from
the rear side original guide. Before performing this adjustment, be sure to perform the horizontal
image distortion adjustment in the laser scanner section.
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
• When the mirror base wire is replaced.
• When the copy lamp unit and no. 2/3 mirror unit are replaced.
• When the mirror unit rail is replaced and moved.
• When a following copy is made.

Glass holding plate A3 (11" x 17") white paper Original Copy A Copy B
Fit the paper edge and
the glass holding plate edge.
1) Make an original for the adjustment.
2) Open the original cover and make a normal (100%) copy.
Make test sheet by drawing parallel lines at 10mm from the both
3) Measure the width of the black background at the lead edge and at
ends of A3 (11" x 17") white paper as shown below. (These lines
the rear edge.
must be correctly parallel to each other.)

Parallel line Parallel line

10mm 10mm

Paper exit direction


La: Lead edge black background width 10mm 10mm
Lb: Rear edge black background width
White paper
If the width (La) of the black background at the lead edge is equal
that (Lb) at the rear edge, there is no need to execute the following 2) Make a normal (100%) copy of the test sheet on A3 (11" x 17")
procedures of 4) – 7). paper. (Fit the paper edge and the glass holding plate edge.)
4) Loosen the mirror base drive pulley fixing screw on the front frame 3) Measure the distances (La, Lb, Lc, Ld) at the four corners as
side or on the rear frame side. shown below.
• When La < Lb
La Lc
Turn the mirror base drive pulley on the front frame side in the
arrow direction A. (Do not move the mirror base drive pulley shaft.)
• When La > Lb
Turn the mirror base drive pulley on the rear frame side in the
arrow direction A. (Do not move the mirror base drive pulley shaft.)
Rear side Paper exit
direction
A

Lb Ld

Front side When La = Lb and Lc = Ld, no need to perform the procedures 4)


and 5).

5) Tighten the fixing screw of the mirror base drive pulley.

AR-5726/5731 ADJUSTMENTS 5 - 6
4) Move the mirror base B rail position up and down (in the arrow <Adjustment specification>
direction) to adjust. Note: A judgment must be made with 200mm width, and must not be
made with 100mm width.
Adjustment Setting
Spec value SIM Set value
mode range
Main scanning At normal: 48- Add 1: 0.1% 1 – 99
direction ±1.0% 1-1 increase
magnification Reduce 1: 0.1%
ratio decrease
(10) Sub scanning direction (scanning direction)
magnification ratio adjustment
(SIM 48-1-2, SIM 48-1-3)
a. OC mode in copying
Note: Execute the procedure after completion of SIM 48-1-1.
1) Put a scale on the original table as shown below, and make a nor-
mal (100%) copy.

• When La > Lb
Shift the mirror base B rail upward by the half of the difference of
La–Lb.
• When La < Lb
Shift the mirror base B rail downward by the half of the difference
of Lb–La.
Example: When La = 12mm and Lb = 9mm, shift the mirror base
B rail upward by 1.5mm.
2) Compare the scale image and the actual scale.
• When Lc >Ld If necessary, perform the following adjustment procedures.
Shift the mirror base B rail downward by the half of the difference
3) Execute SIM 48-1-2.
of Lc–Ld.
4) Enter the set value and press the start key.
• When Lc < Ld
The set value is stored and a copy is made.
When Lc < Ld, move the mirror base B on the paper feed side
upward. <Adjustment specification>
∗ When moving the mirror base rail, hold the mirror base rail with Adjustment Setting
Spec value SIM Set value
your hand. mode range
<Adjustment specification> Sub scanning At normal: 48-1- Add 1: 1 – 99
direction ±1.0% 2 0.05% increase
La = Lb, Lc = Ld
magnification Reduce 1:
5) After completion of adjustment, manually turn the mirror base drive ratio (OC mode) 0.05% decrease
pulley, scan the mirror base A and mirror base B fully, and check
that the mirror bases are not in contact with each other. b. RSPF mode in copying
∗ If the mirror base rail is moved extremely, the mirror base may be in Note: Before performing this adjustment, be sure to check that the
contact with the frame or the original glass. Be careful to avoid this. CCD unit is properly installed and that OC mode adjustment in
copying has been completed.
(9) Main scanning direction (FR direction) magnification 1) Put a scale on the original table as shown below, and make a nor-
ratio adjustment (SIM 48-1) mal (100%) copy to make a test chart.
Note: Before performing this adjustment, be sure to check that the
CCD unit is properly installed.
1) Put a scale on the original table as shown below.

Note: Since the printed copy is used as a test chart, put the scale in
parallel with the front side edge of the glass.
2) Set the test chart on the RSPF and make a normal (100%) copy.
2) Execute SIM 48-1.
3) Compare the scale image and the actual image.
3) After warm-up, shading is performed and the current set value of If necessary, perform the following adjustment procedures.
the main scanning direction magnification ratio is displayed on the
4) Execute SIM 48-1-3.
display section in 2 digits.
5) After warm-up, shading is performed.
4) Manual correction mode (SIM48-1-1)
The current front surface sub scanning direction magnification ratio
Enter the set value and press the start key. correction value is displayed in two digits on the display section.
The correction value is stored and a copy is made.

AR-5726/5731 ADJUSTMENTS 5 - 7
6) Enter the set value and press the start key. <Adjustment specification>
The set value is stored and a copy is made. OC (SPF) open/close position A: 125 – 225mm
7) Execute SIM 48-1-4. 3) If the distance is outside the specified range, adjust the open/close
The current back surface sub scanning direction magnification ratio sensor attachment plate position as shown below.
is displayed in two digits on the display section.
・ Distance < 125mm: Shift toward A.
8) Enter the set value and press the start key.
・ Distance > 225mm: Shift toward B.
The set value is stored and a copy is made.
<Adjustment specification>
Spec Setting
Adjustment mode SIM Set value
value range
Sub scanning At normal: 48-1-3 Add 1: 1 – 99
direction ±1.0% 48-1-4 0.05% increase
magnification ratio Reduce 1: A
(RSPF mode) 0.05% decrease
(11) Off center adjustment (RSPF mode)
Note: Before performing this adjustment, be sure to check that the
paper off center is properly adjusted.
1) Place the center position adjustment test chart (sheet with a B
straight line in the scan direction at the center) on the RSPF.
2) Make a normal copy from the manual paper feed tray, and check
the printed copy with the test chart. (13) Original sensor adjustment (SIM 41-2, 41-4)
If any adjustment is required, perform the following procedure. 1) Set A3 (11" x 17") paper on the OC table.
3) Execute SIM 50-12. (Keep the SPF (OC cover) open.)
4) After warm-up, shading is performed and the current set value of 2) Execute SIM 41-2.
the off center adjustment is displayed on the display section in 2 3) Keep A=125mm, and execute SIM 41-4. (Do not put paper on the
digits. table.)
5) Enter the set value and press the start key. 4) Check the reaction with SIM 41-1.
The set value is stored and a copy is made.
(14) RSPF white correction pixel position adjustment
<Adjustment specification> (required in an RSPF model when replacing the lens
Adjustment Setting unit) (SIM63-7)
Spec value SIM Set value
mode range 1) Fully open the RSPF.
Original off Single: Center 50-12 Add 1: 0.1mm 1 – 99 2) Execute SIM 63-7.
center mode ± 3.0mm shift to R side
3) When the operation panel displays "COMPLETE," the adjustment
(RSPF Duplex: Center Reduce 1: 0.1mm
is completed.
mode) ±3.5mm shift to L side
4) If the operation panel displays "ERROR," perform the following
(12) OC (RSPF) open/close detection position adjustment measures.
1) Execute SIM 41-3. • When the display is 0:
2) Gradually close the OC (RSPF) from the full open position, and Check that the SPF is open.
measure distance A when the display on the operation panel Check that the lamp is ON. (If the lamp is OFF, check the MCU con-
changes. (See the figure below.) nector.)
Check that the CCD harness is properly inserted into the MCU con-
nector.
• When the display is 281 or above:
1) Remove the table glass.
2) Remove the dark box.
3) Slide the lens unit toward the front side and attach it, then exe-
Distance A = Table glass top - OC (RSPF) handle rib cute SIM.
• When the display is 143 or below:
1) Remove the table glass.
2) Remove the dark box.
3) Slide the lens unit toward the rear side and attach it, then execute
SIM.

F R

∗ When the lens unit is moved, execute the OC main scanning magni-
fication ratio auto adjustment, SIM 48-1-1.
∗ This adjustment is basically O.K. with SIM 63-7.

AR-5726/5731 ADJUSTMENTS 5 - 8
(15) RSPF scan position auto adjustment C. Image density (exposure) adjustment
[Function] (1) Copy mode (SIM46-2)
Used to adjust the RSPF scan position automatically. 1) Set a test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) on the OC table as shown
[Operation] below.

1) With the RSPF or the OC cover open, place a white paper back- Rear
ground on the OC glass. (In the RSPF standard model, the RSPF
glass surface is included.)
2) Enter SIM53-08, and press [START] button.
Outline of SIM: The optical unit is shifted to recognize the bound-
ary between the OC glass and the RSPF glass cover.
With the same position as the reference, the RSPF scan position is
automatically adjusted.
<Note>
• After completion of the RSPF scan position auto adjustment, the
RSPF lead edge adjustment must be executed. (Both surfaces)
• There must be no other sheet than the black chart on the glass sur-
face. Front

• Especially when in RSPF scan, the center area is scanned in the 2) Place three or more sheets of A3 (11" x 17") paper on the test
main scan direction. Be careful to prevent external light from enter- chart.
ing the scan area.
3) Execute SIM 46-2.
3) Check that the lead edge is not shifted. (Both surfaces)
4) After warm-up, shading is performed and the current set value of
(If the original lead edge adjustment has been made properly, even
the density (exposure) level is displayed on the display section in 2
when the scan position is shifted, it is followed automatically.)
digits.
For mode selection, use the [10-key].
For the RSPF standard-provision
Place only the white
machine, check that the white 5) Change the set value with the [10-key] to adjust the copy image
paper on the OC glass.
paper covers the SPF glass. density.
6) Make a copy and check that the specification below is satisfied.
Note: Place originals in the rear reference, and the test chart in the
front reference when adjusting the exposure.
<Adjustment specification>
Exposure Sharp Gray Setting
Density mode Set value
level Chart output range
Placing the white paper
AUTO – "3" is copied. If too bright,
The white chart must cover TEXT 3.0 "3" is copied. increase the
this area. quantity displayed
TEXT/PHOTO 3.0 "3" is copied.
on the copy
PHOTO 3.0 "2" is copied. quantity display.
AE If too dark, 1 – 99
– "3" is copied. decrease the
(TONER SAVE)
TEXT quantity displayed
3.0 "3" is copied. on the copy
(TONER SAVE)
quantity display.
TEXT PHOTO
3.0 "3" is copied.
(TONER SAVE)

AR-5726/5731 ADJUSTMENTS 5 - 9
[6] SIMULATION
1. General B. Code-type simulation
A. Outline and purpose (1) Operating procedures and operations
The simulation has the following functions to grasp the machine oper- * Entering the simulation mode
ating status, identify the trouble position and causes in an earlier stage, 1) #/P key (program) ON → Asterisk (*) key ON → CLEAR key ON →
and make various setups and adjustments speedily for improving the Asterisk (*) key ON → Ready for input of a main code of simulation
serviceability of the machine. 2) Entering a main code with the 10-key → START key ON
1) Various adjustments 3) Entering a sub code with the 10-key → START key ON
2) Setup of specifications and functions 4) Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
3) Canceling troubles 5) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected item.
4) Operation check Press START key to start the simulation operation.
5) Various counters check, setup, and clear To cancel the current simulation mode or to change the main code
6) Machine operating status (operation history) data check, clear and the sub code, press the SYSTEM SETTINGS key.
7) Transfer of various data (adjustments, setup, operations, counters) * Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode
The operating procedures and the displays differ depending on the 1) Press CLEAR ALL key.
form of the operation panel of the machine. (2) How to change the simulation adjustment value set by
the touch panel in the adjustment value entry process
a. Target SIM list
3-7, 8-1, 8-2, 8-3, 8-10, 8-11, 8-12, 9-5, 43-1, 44-34, 46-2, 46-9, 46-10,
46-11, 46-18, 46-20, 46-30, 46-31, 48-1, 48-2, 50-1, 50-5, 50-6, 50-10,
50-12, 51-1, 51-2, 51-9, 53-7
b. Touch panel operating procedure
• In the adjustment value setup menu, the selected item is highlighted.
Change is made to the highlighted simulation adjustment value.
• If all the list of the adjustment items is not shown on one page, touch
[↑] and [↓] button to shift the page.
• To change an adjustment value, touch the select the item to change
the adjustment value. (The selected item is highlighted.) Enter the
adjustment value and perform one of the following procedures, and
the display of the adjustment value of the selected item is renewed
as well as the adjustment value.
1) Touch [OK] button.
2) Touch another selected item to change the selection state.
3) If all the list of the adjustment items cover two or more pages,
touch [↑] and [↓] button to shift the page.
4) Press [START] key.
* For simulations which allow confirmation print, copying is started
after changing the adjustment value.
(46-2, 46-9, 46-10, 46-11, 46-18, 48-1, 48-2, 50-1, 50-5, 50-6, 50-10,
50-12, 51-2, the bold-faced items in the above list.)
* If the entry value is outside the adjustable range, an error buzzer
sounds and the adjustment value is not renewed. Page shift is not
made, either.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 1
START (Normal mode)
L1

Press the #/P key.


∗ In the cause of SIM which is set by touch panel, the
Press the START key. changed content can be stored by the following key, touch.
Press the asterisk (*) key.
· [OK] key
· Other item selection
1 · ↑ ↓ key
The changed content
Press the clear key. is stored.
4
Press the asterisk (*) key.
Do you
want to end the YES
simulation ?
Standby for entry of
SIM code. Press the clear all key.
NO

Enter the main code of The simulation mode


SIM with the 10-key. is canceled.

The main code of SIM Returns to START


is displayed. (Normal mode).

3
Press the START key. Do you want NO
to perform another
simulation ?
2
YES
NO
Is there a sub code ? Press the SYSTEM
SETTINGS key
YES

Standby for entry of


SIM sub code. YES
Is it the same
simulation ?
Enter the sub code of
3
SIM with the 10-key.
NO
2
Press the START key. Press the SYSTEM
SETTINGS key

NO 4
Is there a item
selection?

YES

Select the mode and the


item with the ↑ ↓ key
and the item key.

YES
Operation check ?

Press the START key.


NO

Operation is made according


to the selected mode and item.

YES
Operating conditions
check ? If "Operation condition check"
Press the START key. refer to "Sensor display", this
NO
process is not necessary.

Operation is made according


to the selected mode and item.
YES
Data clear ?
Press the START key.
NO Select "YES".

The selected mode and


the item are cleared.
Adjustments NO
or setting (counter data
change) ?
Operation is made according
YES
to the select ed mode and the it
The display is made according (Other modes)
to the selected mode and the item.

Do you NO
want to change the
content ?

YES 1

Enter the new setting and


adjustment values.

L1

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 2
2. Simulation code list Code
Function
Main Sub
Code
Function Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U2/PF
Main Sub 14 0
troubles.
Used to check the operation of the scanner unit 16 0 Used to cancel the self-diag U2 trouble.
1
and its control circuit.
1 17 0 Used to cancel the self diag “PF” trouble.
Used to check the operation of sensor and detector
2 21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle.
in the scanning (read) section and the related circuit.
1 Used to check the counter value of each section.
Used to check the operation of the RSPF unit and
1 Used to check the total numbers of misfeed and
the related circuit.
troubles. (When the number of misfeed is
Used to check the operation of sensors and detectors
2 2 2 considerably great, it is judged as necessary for
in the RSPF unit and the related circuit.
repair. The misfeed rate is obtained by dividing this
Used to check the operation of the loads in the count value with the total counter value.)
3
RSPF unit and the control circuits.
Used to check the misfeed positions and the
Used to check the operation of sensor and detector number of misfeed at each position.
2 3
in the finisher and the related circuit.
(When the number of misfeed is considerably
Used to check the operation of the load in the great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.)
3
finisher and the control circuit.
4 Used to check the total trouble (self diag) history.
10 Used to make each adjustment of the finisher. Used to check the ROM version of each unit
3
Used to check the shifter operation. 5
(section).
Reciprocating operations are continuously Used to print each system setting, the account
11 performed or the home position is checked. 6
22 information, and the machine adjustment values.
(The shifter is shifted to the home position or
7 Used to display of the administrator password.
moved in one way by the specified steps.)
8 Used to display the original, staple counter.
Used to check the operation of sensor and detector
2 Used to check the number of use of each paper
in the option tray and the related circuit. 9
4 feed section. (the number of prints)
Used to check the operation of the load in the
3 10 Used to check the system configuration.
option tray and the control circuit.
Used to display the FAX send/receive counter
Used to check the operation of the display (LED), 11
1 (FAX reception and print counter).
LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit.
Used to check the misfeed positions and the
Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and
5 2 number of misfeed at each position.
the control circuit. 12
(When the number of misfeed is considerably
Used to check the operation of the copy lamp and
3 great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.)
the control circuit.
13 Used to display the CRUM type.
Used to check the operation of the loads (clutches
Used to display the scanner counter in the network
1 and solenoids) in the paper transport system and 19
scanner mode.
6 the control circuit.
Used to clear the misfeed counter, the misfeed
Used to check the operation of each fan motor and
2 history, the trouble counter, and the trouble history.
its control circuit. 1
(The counters are cleared after completion of
1 Used to set the aging operation conditions.
maintenance.)
7 6 Used to set the cycle of intermittent aging.
Used to clear the number of use (the number of
8 Used to set the display of the warm-up time. 2
prints) of each paper feed section.
Used to check and adjust the operation of the Used to clear the number usage data of the stapler,
1 developing bias voltage in each copy mode and the 3
RSPF, and scanning.
control circuit.
4 Used to reset the maintenance counter.
Used to check and adjust the operation of the main
Used to reset the developer counter.
2 charger grid voltage in each copy mode and the
24 5 (The developer counter of the DV unit which is
control circuit.
installed is reset.)
Used to check and adjust the operation of the
6 Used to clear the copy counter.
10 developing bias voltage in each printer mode and
Used to clear the OPC drum (membrane decrease)
the control circuit.
8 7 correction counter. (This simulation is executed
Used to check and adjust the operation of the main
when the OPC drum is replaced.)
11 charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the
Used to clear the printer counter and other
control circuit. 9
counters.
Used to check and adjust the operation of the
10 FAX counter data clear
13 developing bias voltage in FAX mode and the
control circuit. Used to clear the scanner counter in the network
15
scanner mode.
Used to check and adjust the operation of the main
14 charger grid voltage in FAX mode and the control Used to check the operation of the main drive
circuit. (excluding the scanner section) and to check the
1 operation of the toner concentration sensor.
Used to check and adjust the operation of the load
1 25 (The toner concentration sensor output can be
(motor) in the duplex section and the control circuit.
monitored.)
4 Duplex motor RPM setting
9 Used to make the initial setting of toner
Used to adjust the timing of switching from normal 2
concentration when replacing developer.
5 rotation to reverse rotation or from reverse rotation
Used to set whether the job separator is installed
to normal rotation of the duplex motor.
26 1 or not. (Since this cannot be detected by hardware
Used to check the operation of the toner motor and
10 0 detection, it is set in this simulation.)
its control circuit.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 3
Code Code
Function Function
Main Sub Main Sub
Used to set whether the automatic detection of 1 Used to set the fusing temperature.
2
paper size is made or not. 43 Used to set the paper feed cycle timing when
10
Used to set the specifications of the auditor. printing postcards.
3 Setting must be made depending on the use Used to make various setups in each mode of
1
condition of the auditor. process control.
Used to set the count mode of the total counter and 2 Drum life correction setting
5
the maintenance counter. 3 Used to set the DV count correction.
Used to set the specifications depending on the Used to display the process control correction
6 9
destination. information.
12 Used to input the Software Key for E-MAIL RIC. Used to display the environment (temperature,
Used to input the Software Key for the PS 14
humidity) correction information.
14
extension kit. 44 Used to set the toner density control correction
18 Used to set enable/disable of toner save operation. 16
value.
Used to set the specification (language display) for Used to display the toner density control reference
22 17
the destination. value.
Used to set ON/OFF of the heater lamp slow-up Used to set the transfer current value in each
30 34
control conforming to the CE mark control. mode.
Used to set whether the same continuous troubles Used to set the time from the start of the main
are displayed as one trouble or the series of 40 motor rotation (Ready) to the start of toner supply
35
troubles with SIM 22-4 when the same troubles in previous rotation after turning on the power.
occur continuously. Used to set the exposure level in each exposure
2
Used to set whether the machine is stopped or not mode.
36
26 when the maintenance counter life is expired. Used to adjust the shift amount and the inclination
Used to set whether the machine is stopped or not 9 value for each level (1 to 5) of the exposure mode
37
when the developer counter life is expired. (Text).
Used to set whether the machine is stopped or not Used to adjust the shift amount and the inclination
38
when the drum counter life is expired. 10 value for each level (1 to 5) of the exposure mode
Used to set ON/OFF of the black and white (Text/Photo).
50
reversion function. Used to adjust the shift amount and the inclination
56 Gamma life correction setting 11 value for each level (1 to 5) of the exposure mode
57 Used to set the model code. (Photo).
Used to set enable/disable of the FAX mode key FAX exposure level adjustment
12
60 when FAX is not installed. (When FAX is installed, (1 mode automatic adjustment)
the FAX mode is enabled regardless of this setup.) FAX exposure level adjustment
13
69 Toner near end setting (Normal mode individual adjustment)
In the power save time setting, the pre-heat (pre- 46 FAX exposure level adjustment
14
heat mode setting) and the auto power shut off (Fine text mode individual adjustment)
time can be set to the short time setup (pre-heat: 1 FAX exposure level adjustment
71 15
min, auto power shut off: 1 min) and the long time (Super Fine mode individual adjustment)
setup (pre-heat: 15min, auto power shut off: FAX exposure level adjustment
16
60min). (Ultra Fine mode individual adjustment)
The letterhead support is set. 18 Used to adjust inclination for each exposure mode.
When “Letterhead paper setting” is selected, the Used to set the control method of the exposure
72 19
set value of SIM 26-46 (Image output direction mode.
setting) is set to “Setting Enable” accordingly. Used to set the exposure correction value of SPF/
Used to display the sensor status attached to the 20
1 RSPF for OC exposure.
machine. Used to set the AE and the limit value in AE
Used to display the status of the sensors attached 30
30 (Toner save).
to the standard tray and the manual feed tray. (Use Used to set the AE and the limit value in AE
2 31
SIM 4-2 for the option trays.) (Toner save).
The sensor of an uninstalled tray is not displayed. 39 Used to switch the FAX send image quality.
Used to check the sensor of the machine manual Used to adjust the copy mode magnification ratio
1
feed tray. 1
(main scanning direction, sub scanning direction).
Used to adjust the manual paper feed tray paper Used to adjust the scanner mode magnification
40 2
width detector detection level. 2
ratio (main/sub scanning direction).
The AD conversion value of manual feed width 48
3 Used to adjust the print mode magnification ratio
detection is displayed. 3
correction.
Used to check the document size detection photo 8 FAX magnification adjustment (read)
1
sensor.
9 FAX magnification adjustment (print)
Used to adjust the detection level of the document
2 1 Used to adjust the copy lead edge position.
size photo sensor.
Used to adjust the print image position (top margin)
41 Used to check the light reception level and the 5
on the print paper in the print mode.
3 detection level of the original size detection photo
50 Used to adjust the print image position (top margin)
sensor. 6
on print paper in the copy mode. (RSPF)
Used to adjust the detection level of OC 20
4 8 FAX lead edge adjustment (read)
degrees.
9 FAX lead edge adjustment (print)

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 4
Code Code
Function Function
Main Sub Main Sub
Used to adjust the print image center position. Used to check the DTFM signal send operation.
17
10 (Adjustment can be made for each paper feed (Signal send level: Max.)
50 section.) Used to check the DTFM signal send operation.
18
Used to adjust the print image center position. (Signal send level: Set by soft SW.)
12
(Adjustment can be made for each document mode.) 19 Used to write the SRAM data to the Flash ROM.
1 Used to adjust the OPC drum separation pawl ON time. 20 Used to write the Flash ROM data to the SRAM.
Used to adjust the contact pressure of paper onto 21 FAX information print
the resist roller in each section (copier paper feed 22 Handset sound volume adjustment (Japan only)
section, duplex paper feed section, RSPF paper 66 24 Used to clear the FAST storage data. (SEC only)
2
feed section). (When the print image position 30 Used to set the TEL/LIU.
51 varies greatly for the paper or when a lot of paper
31 Used to set the TEL/LIU.
jam troubles occur, the adjustment is required.)
32 Receive data check
Used to set the OPC drum separation pawl
8 33 Signal detection check
operation inhibit. (ON/OFF)
34 Communication time measurement display
Used to adjust the OPC drum separation voltage
9 37 Speaker sound volume adjustment
ON/OFF timing.
Used to adjust the detection level of the RSPF 41 CI signal check
width. The adjustment method is the 4-point 52 Pseudo-ringer check
6 system. Set the guide to Max. (A3/WLetter)
position, A4R/Letter R position, A5R/Invoice R
position, and Min. position for adjustment.
Used to enter the RSPF width detection
7
adjustment value.
Used to adjust the RSPF scan position of the
53
mirror unit automatically. For the RSPF scan
position automatic adjustment, the mirror unit is
8 shifted to 11mm before the RSPF glass cover
edge, and is operated automatically to scan
images by the unit of 1 step, detecting the position
up to the glass cover automatically.
9 RSPF read position adjustment
10 RSPF exp adjustment
55 1 Used to set the soft switch.
Used to check the LSU (polygon motor) operation.
61 1 Check speed can select 145mm/s or 122mm/s
individually.
Used to check the result of shading correction.
1
(The shading correction data are displayed.)
Used to adjust the RSPF white correction start
63
pixel position automatically.
7
This adjustment is performed after the lens unit is
replaced.
Used to check the operation of the printer function
64 1
(auto print operation).
Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display
1
section) detection position.
65 Used to check the touch panel (LCD display
2
section) detection position adjustment result.
5 Used to check the key inputs of the operation panel.
1 Used to change and check the FAX-related soft SW.
Used to clear the FAX-related soft SW.
2
(Except for the FAX adjustment values)
3 FAX PWB memory check
4 Signal send mode (Signal send level: Max.)
5 Signal send mode (Signal send level soft SW setting)
6 Printing the confidential password
7 Print the screen memory contents
66 10 Image data memory clear
Used to send 300bps signals.
11
(Signal send level: Max.)
Used to send 300bps signals.
12
(Signal send level: Set by soft SW)
13 Used to register the dial numbers.
14 Used to perform the dial test. (10 PPS send test)
15 Used to perform the dial test. (20 PPS send test)
16 Used to perform the dial test. (DTFM signal send test)

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 5
3. Details of simulation 2-2
Purpose Operation test/check
Function Used to check the operation of sensors and detectors
1 (Purpose) in the RSPF unit and the related circuit.
Section RSPF
Item Operation
1-1
Operation/procedure
Purpose Operation test/check
The operations of sensors and detectors in the RSPF section are dis-
Function Used to check the operation of the scanner unit and its
played.
(Purpose) control circuit.
Section Optical (Image scanning) The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
Item Operation (For the original size, the detection result of the original size displayed
on the copy menu is highlighted.)
Operation/procedure
EMPS Original empty sensor
Enter the number of operations, and set the magnification ratio and the
DLS1 Original length sensor (Small)
original size.
DLS2 Original length sensor (Large)
1. Select the desired item, and press the [START] key. FGOD RSPF paper feed cover open/close sensor
2. Enter the set value with the 10-key, and press the [START] key. DFD RSPF paper entry sensor
The scanner unit operates at the speed corresponding to the set value. RDD RSPF original exit sensor
The scan counter is displayed during execution. OPCLS Book sensor
25% to 400% (1% increment) Original detection width sensor
Set magnification ratio SWD_LEN (Unit of 0.1mm. “Width x 10” is displayed. Example: For
(Default 100%)
Document size Varies depending on the destination. 300mm, 3000 is displayed.)
Set number of times 1 to 999 (0: Continuous operation) SWD_A/D Original detection width sensor A/D value
RSPF width detection size (One of the following is displayed.)

1-2 A4/A3, LT/WLT, B5/B4, INV/LTR, A5/A4R, B5R, EXTRA, 8K/16K,


16KR
Purpose Operation test/check Note: Executable only when the RSPF is installed.
Function Used to check the operation of sensor and detector in
(Purpose) the scanning (read) section and the related circuit.
2-3
Section Optical (Image scanning)
Item Operation Purpose Operation test/check
Function Used to check the operation of the loads in the RSPF
Operation/procedure
(Purpose) unit and the control circuits.
The status of sensors and detectors in the scanner section is dis-
Section RSPF
played. The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
Item Operation
MHPS Mirror home position sensor
Operation/procedure
Select the load to be checked with the 10-key, and press the [START]
key.

2 The motor for 10sec, the solenoid ON for 500msec, OFF for 500msec.
(20 times)
Item Content
2-1
1 DTM-F RSPF motor forward rotation
Purpose Operation test/check 2 DTM-R RSPF motor reverse rotation
Function Used to check the operation of the RSPF unit and the 3 DFCL RSPF paper feed clutch
(Purpose) related circuit. 4 CLH RSPF PS clutch
Section RSPF 5 GSOL Document exit gate solenoid
Item Operation 6 RSOL Document exit pressure solenoid
Operation/procedure Note: Executable only when the RSPF is installed.
Enter the number of operations, and set the magnification ratio and the
original size.
1. Select the desired item, and press the [START] key.
2. Enter the set value with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
The RSPF unit operates at the speed corresponding to the set value.
The scan counter is displayed during execution.
50% to 200% (1% increment)
Set magnification ratio
(Default 100%)
Document size Varies depending on the destination.
Duplex Selectable only when RSPF is installed.
Set number of times 1 to 999 (0: Continuous operation)
Note: Executable only when the RSPF is installed.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 6
3-10
3
Purpose Adjustment
3-2 Function
Used to make each adjustment of the finisher.
(Purpose)
Purpose Operation test/check
Item Operation
Function Used to check the operation of sensor and detector in
(Purpose) the finisher and the related circuit. Operation/procedure
Section Finisher 1. Select an item to be adjusted with 10-key, and press [START] key.
Item Operation 2. Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [START] key.
Operation/procedure Installation
Item Content Default
Used to display the operations of sensors and detectors in the finisher range
section. Paper alignment
1 FPAM ADJUST 40-60 50
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted. width adjustment
FDTPD Paper delivery tray paper detector Paper delivery roller
FSTPD Staple tray paper detector 2 FDRLM ADJUST descending position 40-60 50
adjustment
FAPHPS-R Paper alignment plate HP sensor R
FAPHPS-F Paper alignment plate HP sensor F
FDRPS Delivery roller position sensor
FPPD1 Paper pass detector 3-11
FDTLLS Delivery tray lower limit sensor
Purpose Operation test/check
FTPS Tray position sensor
Used to check the shifter operation.
FPLD Paper level detector
Reciprocating operations are continuously performed
FSSW Safety switch Function
or the home position is checked.
FSLD Staple lead edge detector (Purpose)
(The shifter is shifted to the home position or moved in
FSED Staple empty detector one way by the specified steps.)
FSHPS Staple HP sensor Item Operation
FPRD Process tray paper rear edge detection
Operation/procedure
FPLS Paper level sensor
Select item “1,” and press the [START] key.
Note: Executable only when the finisher is installed. The shifter is reciprocated continuously at the specified interval.
Item Content
1 F-R Reciprocating operation
3-3
2 HP CHECK Home position check
Purpose Operation test/check
[Selection 2]
Function Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher
(Purpose) and the control circuit. 1. Select item “2,” and press the [START] key.
Section Finisher 2. Move the shifter to the home position or in one way by the speci-
Item Operation fied steps with the following keys.

Operation/procedure [*] key Shifts the position toward R side by the specified steps.
[0 key Shifts the position toward HP side by the specified steps.
Select the load to be checked with the 10-key, and press the [START]
[#] key Shifts to F.
key.
SFTHP Shifter home position (At detection, highlighted)
The finisher main motor operates for 10sec, the staple motor 5 times,
the tray lift-up motor one reciprocating operation, other motors max. 20
reciprocating operations from the home position, the solenoid repeats
500msec ON and 500msec OFF 20 times.
The staple operation motor operates only when there is no cartridge
installed.
Item Content
1 FTLM Tray lift motor
2 FSM Staple motor
3 FPAM-R Paper alignment motor R
4 FPAM-F Paper alignment motor F
5 FPDM Paper delivery motor
6 FPS Paddle solenoid
7 FPTM Paper transport motor
8 FDRLM Delivery roller lift motor
9 FPGS Paper gate solenoid
10 FARLS Alignment roller lift solenoid
11 FSL Staple light

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 7
4 5
4-2 5-1
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Operation test/check
Function Used to check the operation of sensor and detector in Function Used to check the operation of the display (LED), LCD
(Purpose) the option tray and the related circuit. (Purpose) in the operation panel, and control circuit.
Section Paper feed Section Operation (screen/operation)
Item Operation Item Operation
Operation/procedure Operation/procedure
The operating states of the sensor and the detector are displayed. The LCD is displayed as follows. (All LED’s are ON.)
(Only the installed option trays are displayed. For the standard tray, With the upper half highlighted and the lower half normally displayed,
use SIM 30-2.) contrast changes “Standard → MAX → MIN.” in every 2sec.
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
PED2 2nd tray paper empty sensor
LUD2 2nd tray paper upper limit detection sensor
PFD2 2nd tray paper pass sensor
CD2 2nd tray empty sensor
PED3 3rd tray paper empty sensor
LUD3 3rd tray paper upper limit detection sensor (6 sec later)
PFD3 3rd tray paper pass sensor With the upper half normally displayed and the lower half highlighted,
CD3 3rd tray empty sensor contrast changes “Standard → MAX → MIN.” in every 2sec.
PED4 4th tray paper empty sensor
LUD4 4th tray paper upper limit detection sensor
PFD4 4th tray paper pass sensor
CD4 4th tray empty sensor
DSWR2 2nd tray right door detection sensor
DSWR3 3rd tray right door detection sensor
DSWR4 4th tray right door detection sensor * When returning to the sub menu selection menu, the display of the
Note: Execution is possible only when the option tray is installed. standard contrast is displayed for an instant.

4-3 5-2

Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Operation test/check


Function Used to check the operation of the load in the option Function Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the
(Purpose) tray and the control circuit. (Purpose) control circuit.
Section Paper feed Section Fusing
Item Operation Item Operation

Operation/procedure Operation/procedure
Select the load to be checked with the 10-key, and press the [START] 1. Select the lamp to be checked with the 10-key, and press the
key. [START] key.
The motor for 10sec, the solenoid ON for 500msec, OFF for 500msec. ON/OFF operation of the heater lamp is repeated 5 times in an interval
of 100ms/900ms.
The lift-up motor operates only when the tray is opened. (20 times)
When completing the operation, the cooling fan is rotated at a low speed.
Item Content Item Content
1 LUM2 2nd tray lift-up motor
Item Content
2 CPFC2 2nd tray pick-up solenoid
1 HL1 Heater lamp 1 (Main) operation
3 CPFS2 2nd tray paper feed clutch
2 HL2 Heater lamp 2 (Sub) operation
4 TRC2 2nd tray transport roller clutch
2nd tray paper transport motor
5 DM
(3rd tray paper transport motor)
5-3
6 LUM3 3rd tray lift-up motor
7 CPFC3 3rd tray pick-up solenoid Purpose Operation test/check
8 CPFS3 3rd tray paper feed clutch Function Used to check the operation of the copy lamp and the
9 TRC3 3rd tray transport roller clutch (Purpose) control circuit.
10 LUM4 4th tray lift-up motor Section Optical (Image scanning)
11 CPFC4 4th tray pick-up solenoid Item Operation
12 CPFS4 4th tray paper feed clutch Operation/procedure
Note: Execution is possible only when the option tray is installed. When the [START] key is pressed, the copy lamp is lighted for 10sec.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 8
6 7
6-1 7-1
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Setting/Operation test/check
Used to check the operation of the loads (clutches and Function (Purpose) Used to set the aging operation conditions.
Function
solenoids) in the paper transport system and the Item Operation
(Purpose)
control circuit. Operation/procedure
Section Paper transport (Discharge/Switchback/Transport)
1. Select the load to be set with the 10-key.
Item Operation
2. Press the [START] key.
Operation/procedure
When selected without setup, the selected value is registered and
1. Select the load to be checked with the 10-key, and press the highlighted. When selected with previous setup, the previous setup is
[START] key. canceled and it is displayed normally.
The motor for 10sec, the solenoid ON for 500msec, OFF for 500msec. Press [CA] key, and the simulation will be terminated and the machine
(20 times) goes into the aging standby mode with the set content.
When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] is pressed, the operation is interrupted. This setting is canceled by power OFF.
The lift-up motor operates only when the tray is opened.
Item Content
Item Content 1 AGING Aging enable/disable setting
1 LUM1 1st tray lift-up motor 2 MISFEED Jam detection enable/disable setting
2 CPFC1 1st tray pick-up solenoid Fusing operation enable/disable setting
3 CPFS1 1st tray paper feed clutch 3 FUSING*1 The fusing temperature is not controlled.
4 MPFS Manual feed pick-up solenoid The heater is not turned ON.
5 RRC Resist roller clutch 4 INTERVL Intermittent setting (Valid only when set to AGING.)
6 PSPS Separation pawl solenoid Warm-up save setting
7 OGS Paper exit gate switching solenoid The machine goes into the ready state only by
8 LUM2 2nd tray lift-up motor 5 WARMUP shading, disregarding fusing and process control.
9 CPFC2 2nd tray pick-up solenoid After going into the ready state, normal control is
performed.
10 CPFS2 2nd tray paper feed clutch
11 TRC2 2nd tray transport roller clutch 6 DV CHK. Developing unit detection enable/disable setting
12 LUM3 3rd tray lift-up motor *1: When the machine exits from the fusing ignoring state, the roller
13 CPFC3 3rd tray pick-up solenoid may be cooled down. Therefore, reset the machine to warm up
14 CPFS3 3rd tray paper feed clutch again.
15 TRC3 3rd tray transport roller clutch When, therefore, the simulation is canceled by pressing the [CA]
key or when the copy mode display is shifted to the initial menu
16 LUM4 4th tray lift-up motor
display in the simulation mode of one page copy, the machine is
17 CPFC4 4th tray pick-up solenoid
reset.
18 CPFS4 4th tray paper feed clutch
Note: In SIM 7-1, pressing [CA] key terminates the simulation and the
19 ROGS Right paper exit gate solenoid
machine enters the aging mode without resetting. Therefore, to
The lift-up motor operates only when the tray is opened. perform “4. Intermittent setup,” the intermittent cycle must be set
with SIM 7-6 in advance.
6-2 Reset is not performed when the machine enters the aging mode.

Purpose Operation test/check


7-6
Function Used to check the operation of each fan motor and its
(Purpose) control circuit. Purpose Setting/Operation test/check
Section Others Function (Purpose) Used to set the cycle of intermittent aging.
Item Operation Item Operation

Operation/procedure Operation/procedure
Select the load to be checked with the 10-key, and press the [START] 1. Enter the interval aging cycle time (sec) with the 10-key pad.
key. Refer to SIM 7-1.
The selected load is operated for 10sec. 2. Press the [START] key.
Item Content When the [START] key is pressed in aging, copying is performed con-
1 VFM Fusing fan operates tinuously. This simulation is used to set the time interval between copy
Power cooling fan, power cooling fan 2 operations in the unit of second.
2 DCFM&DCFM2
operations This setting is valid when SIM 7-1 (Intermittent setting) is enabled.
3 VFM2 Fusing exit paper fan operates Setting range 1-255
Fusing fan, power cooling fan, and Default 3
VFM&DCFM&DCFM2
3 power cooling fan 2 are operated at the
&VFM2
same time.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 9
7-8 8-2
Purpose Setting/Operation test/check Purpose Adjustment/Operation test/check
Function Used to check and adjust the operation of the main
Used to set the display of the warm-up time. Function
(Purpose) charger grid voltage in each copy mode and the control
(Purpose)
Item Operation circuit.
Operation/procedure Image process
Section (Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
1. Warm-up starts by the cover open/close.
Photo conductor
(Can be performed repeatedly by open/close of the cover.)
Operation/procedure
2. The warm-up time is counted up and displayed in the unit of sec.
1. Touch the exposure mode to be changed.
If the [CA] key is pressed at this time, count-up is interrupted to ter-
The current set value is displayed.
minate the simulation. (However, warm-up is continued.)
2. Enter the set value with the 10-key.
3. After completion of warming up, “WARM UP COMPLETED” is dis-
played and the control returns to the initial screen. 3. Press the [START] key.
Output is made with the entered value for 30sec, and the display
returns to the original state.

8 Item Content
Setting
Default
range
1 AE (145) AE (145mm/s) 590
8-1
2 TEXT (145) Character (145mm/s) 590
Purpose Adjustment/Operation test/check
Character/Photo
Used to check and adjust the operation of the 3 TEXT/PHOTO (145) 590
Function (145mm/s)
developing bias voltage in each copy mode and the
(Purpose) 4 PHOTO (145) Photo (145mm/s) 590
control circuit.
Image process 5 TONER SAVE (145) Toner save (145mm/s) 350- 540
Section (Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning) 6 AE (122) AE (122mm/s) 750 590
Developer/Toner hopper
7 TEXT (122) Character (122mm/s) 590
Operation/procedure Character/Photo
1. Touch the exposure mode to be changed. 8 TEXT/PHOTO (122) 590
(122mm/s)
The current set value is displayed.
9 PHOTO (122) Photo (122mm/s) 590
2. Enter the set value with the 10-key.
10 TONER SAVE (122) Toner save (122mm/s) 540
3. Press the [START] key.
Output is made with the entered value, and the display returns to the Min. unit: 10V increment
original state.
(∗) Linked with the destinations of SIM 26-6.
Setting Linked with the auto exposure mode of SIM 46-19-1.
Item Content Default
range
1 AE (145) AE (145mm/s) 450 8-10
2 TEXT (145) Character (145mm/s) 450
Purpose Adjustment/Operation test/check
Character/Photo
3 TEXT/PHOTO (145) 450 Used to check and adjust the operation of the
(145mm/s) Function
developing bias voltage in each printer mode and the
4 PHOTO (145) Photo (145mm/s) 450 (Purpose)
control circuit.
5 TONER SAVE (145) Toner save (145mm/s) 200- 400
Image process
6 AE (122) AE (122mm/s) 650 450
Section (Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
7 TEXT (122) Character (122mm/s) 450
Developer/Toner hopper
Character/Photo
8 TEXT/PHOTO (122) 450
(122mm/s) Operation/procedure
9 PHOTO (122) Photo (122mm/s) 450 1. Touch the exposure mode to be changed.
10 TONER SAVE (122) Toner save (122mm/s) 400 The current set value is displayed.
2. Enter the set value with the 10-key.
(∗) Linked with the destinations of SIM 26-6.
Linked with the auto exposure mode of SIM 46-19-1. 3. Press the [START] key.
The minimum increment is 10V.
The result of (Set value) -200/ 10 is stored in the EEPROM.
When reading a value from the EEPROM, the value of (EEP value
*10+200) is used as the set value.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 10
Output is made with the entered value for 30sec, and the display 8-13
returns to the original state.
Purpose Adjustment/Operation test/check
Installa
Used to check and adjust the operation of the
Item Content tion Default Function
developing bias voltage in FAX mode and the control
range (Purpose)
circuit.
1 DENS1 (145) Density1 (145mm/s) 300
Image process
2 DENS2 (145) Density2 (145mm/s) 370 Section (Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
3 DENS3 (145) Density3 (145mm/s) 420 Developer/Toner hopper
4 DENS4 (145) Density4 (145mm/s) 530 Operation/procedure
5 DENS5 (145) Density5 (145mm/s) 600 1. Enter the set value with the 10-key.
6 TS (145) Toner save (145mm/s) 200- 250 2. Press the [START] key.
7 DENS1 (122) Density1 (122mm/s) 650 300 Output is made with the entered value for 30sec. and the display
8 DENS2 (122) Density2 (122mm/s) 370 returns to the original state.
9 DENS3 (122) Density3 (122mm/s) 420 Setting range 200-650
10 DENS4 (122) Density4 (122mm/s) 530 Default 450
11 DENS5 (122) Density5 (122mm/s) 600
The minimum increment is 10V.
12 TS (122) Toner save (122mm/s) 250 The result of (Set value-200) / 10 is stored in the EEPROM.
When reading a value from the EEPROM, the value of (EEP value ∗ 10
The minimum increment is 10V.
The result of (Set value) -200/ 10 is stored in the EEPROM. +200) is used as the set value.
When reading a value from the EEPROM, the value of (EEP value Therefore, an even number must be entered. If not, the entered odd
number +1 is displayed after pressing [START] key.
*10+200) is used as the set value.

8-14
8-11
Purpose Adjustment/Operation test/check Purpose Adjustment/Operation test/check
Used to check and adjust the operation of the main Used to check and adjust the operation of the main
Function
Function charger grid voltage in FAX mode and the control
charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the (Purpose)
(Purpose) circuit.
control circuit.
Image process Image process
Section (Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Section (Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Photo conductor Photo conductor

Operation/procedure Operation/procedure

1. Touch the exposure mode to be changed. 1. Enter the set value with the 10-key.
The current set value is highlighted. 2. Press the [START] key.
2. Enter the set value with the 10-key. Output is made with the entered value for 30sec. and the display
returns to the original state.
3. Press the [START] key.
Output is made with the entered value for 30sec, and the display Setting range 350-750
returns to the original state. Default 590

Installa
Item Content tion Default
range
1 DENS1 (145) Density 1 (145mm/s) 440 9
2 DENS2 (145) Density 2 (145mm/s) 510
3 DENS3 (145) Density 3 (145mm/s) 560 9-1
4 DENS4 (145) Density 4 (145mm/s) 670
Purpose Operation test/check
5 DENS5 (145) Density 5 (145mm/s) 740 Function Used to check and adjust the operation of the load
6 TS (145) Toner save (145mm/s) 350- 390 (Purpose) (motor) in the duplex section and the control circuit.
7 DENS1 (122) Density 1 (122mm/s) 750 440 Section Duplex
8 DENS2 (122) Density 2 (122mm/s) 510 Item Operation
9 DENS3 (122) Density 3 (122mm/s) 560 Operation/procedure
10 DENS4 (122) Density 4 (122mm/s) 670 1. Select the operation mode with the 10-key.
11 DENS5 (122) Density 5 (122mm/s) 740 2. Press the [START] key.
12 TS (122) Toner save (122mm/s) 390 The operation is performed for 30sec, and the display returns to the
original state.
Min. unit: 10V increment
Item Content
Duplex motor/Duplex 2 motor forward rotation
1 DMF145
(145mm/s)
Duplex motor/Duplex 2 motor forward rotation
2 DMF122
(122mm/s)
Duplex motor/Duplex 2 motor reverse rotation
3 DMR145
(145mm/s)
Duplex motor/Duplex 2 motor reverse rotation
4 DMR122
(122mm/s)

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 11
9-4
16
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Duplex motor RPM setting
16-0
Section Duplex
Item Operation Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag U2 trouble.
Operation/procedure
Item Trouble Error
Enter the set value with the 10-key.
Operation/procedure
When the duplex motor setting is made, the duplex 2motor is also set
accordingly. 1. Press the [START] key.
2. When “1: YES” is selected, U2 trouble is canceled.
Setting range 1-13
(When “2: NO” is selected, the simulation is canceled.)
Default 5

9-5
17
Purpose Adjustment
Used to adjust the timing of switching from normal 17-0
Function
rotation to reverse rotation or from reverse rotation to
(Purpose) Purpose Cancel (Trouble, etc)
normal rotation of the duplex motor.
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self diag “PF” trouble.
Operation/procedure
Item Trouble Error
1. Touch the item to set.
2. Enter the set value with the 10-key, and press the [START] key. Operation/Procedure
1. Press the [START] key.
Item Installation range Default
1 145mm/s 18 2. When “1: YES” is selected, PF trouble is canceled. (When “2: NO”
2 122mm/s 18 is selected, the simulation is canceled.)
18-76
3 RIGHT 145mm/s 50
4 RIGHT 122mm/s 50
21
21-1
10
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle.
10-0
Item Specifications Counter
Purpose Operation test/check
Operation/procedure
Function Used to check the operation of the toner motor and its
1. Enter the set value with the 10-key.
(Purpose) control circuit.
Image process 2. Press the [START] key.
Section (Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning) Content
Item
Developer/Toner hopper 26cpm 31cpm
Item Operation 0 5K 5K
Operation/procedure 1 10K 10K
2 20K 50K
Press the [START] key and operate the toner motor for 30 sec.
3 25K 75K
4 50K 100K
5 75K (Default) 150K (Default) *
14 6 FREE FREE
* When selecting 150K, maintenance message is displayed by imple-
14-0 menting the following conditions.
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.) • Maintenance count = 150K.
Function • DV count = 100K
Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U2/PF troubles.
(Purpose) • DR count = 100K
Item Trouble Error * When maintenance message is displayed, replace consumption part
Operation/procedure reaching the number of sheets of maintenance, then clear the
replaced part's counter only.
1. Press the [START] key.
2. When “1: YES” is selected, troubles other than U2 and PF are can-
celed. (When “2: NO” is selected, the simulation is canceled.)

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 12
(Jam cause code)
22 Item Jam contents
TRAY1 1st tray pick-up miss
22-1 TRAY2 2nd tray pick-up miss
TRAY3 3rd tray pick-up miss
Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check
Purpose TRAY4 4th tray pick-up miss
(display/print)
BPT Multi manual feed pick-up miss
Function
Used to check the counter value of each section. PPD1_ND Paper-in sensor lead edge jam
(Purpose)
PPD1_ST Paper-in sensor rear edge jam
Item Counter
PPD1_DUP Paper-in sensor reverse jam
Operation/procedure PPD2_ND Duplex sensor lead edge jam
Each counter is displayed. PPD2_ST Duplex sensor rear edge jam
TOTAL Total counter PPD_PRI PS time out jam
MAINTENANCE Maintenance counter POD3_ND Right paper exit lead edge jam
DEVE Developer counter POD3_ST Right paper exit rear edge jam
DRUM Drum counter POD2_ND Upper tray paper exit lead edge jam
COPY Copy counter POD2_ST Upper tray paper exit rear edge jam
PRINTER Printer counter POD1_ND Lower tray paper exit lead edge jam
IMC IMC counter POD1_ST Lower tray paper exit rear edge jam
DUPLEX Duplex counter PINT_SHORT Abnormality between PS papers.
OTHERS The other counters PFD2_ND 2nd paper pass lead edge jam
PFD2_ST 2nd paper pass rear edge jam
FAX SEND FAX Send counter
PFD3_ND 3rd paper pass lead edge jam
FAX RCV FAX receive counter
PFD3_ST 3rd paper pass rear edge jam
FAX OUTPUT FAX print counter
PFD4_ND 4th paper pass lead edge jam
DEVE RANGE Developer traveling distance counter
PFD4_ST 4th paper pass rear edge jam
DRUM RANGE Drum traveling distance counter
SIZE_SHORT Duplex short scale error
DEVE ROLL Developer rotation counter (K) FPPD1_N Finisher entry port sensor not-reached jam
DRUM ROLL Drum rotation counter (K) FPPD1_S Finisher entry port sensor remaining jam
DEVE LIFE Developer life meter (%) FSTPD_S Finisher paper exit remaining jam
DRUM LIFE Drum life meter (%) FSTPLJ Finisher staple jam

22-4
22-2
Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check
Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check Purpose
Purpose (display/print)
(display/print)
Function
Used to check the total numbers of misfeed and Used to check the total trouble (self diag) history.
(Purpose)
troubles. (When the number of misfeed is considerably
Function Item Trouble
great, it is judged as necessary for repair. The misfeed
(Purpose)
rate is obtained by dividing this count value with the Operation/procedure
total counter value.) The trouble error codes are displayed in the sequence of the latest one
Item Trouble first. Max. 40 items of information are stored. (Older ones are deleted
Operation/procedure in sequence.) The machine condition can be estimated by this data.
Each counter data are displayed.
PAPER JAM JAM counter 22-5
SPF JAM RSPF JAM counter
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Check
TROUBLE Trouble counter
Function
Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section).
The counter display is in 7 digits. (Purpose)
Item Software
22-3 Operation/procedure
Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check Used to display the ROM version of each section.
Purpose
(display/print) [Display example]
Used to check the misfeed positions and the number of ROM version 1.250 → [1.25] (up to 2 decimal places)
Function misfeed at each position. (When the number of
The display of the protocol monitor and the soft SW follows this dis-
(Purpose) misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as
play.
necessary for repair.)
S/N Machine serial number
Item Trouble Mis-feed
MCU Main Control Unit
Operation/procedure
IMC IMC
The misfeed history is displayed in the sequence of recentness by the
OPE Panel + Panel label code
name of sensors and detectors. Max. 40 items of information can be
stored in memory. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.) The trouble PRINTER PRINTER
section may be determined by the data. NIC NIC
FINISHER FINISHER
FAX FAX

If it is not installed, “- - - - - - - - - -” is displayed.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 13
Panel 22-7
Destination Panel software support language
display
Purpose User data output/Check (Display/Print)
JPN Japan Japanese, American English, English
Function
SEC Used to display of the administrator password.
(Purpose)
SECL
Item Data User data
SUK American English, English, French, Spanish,
EFS
SCA/SCNZ Brazilian Portuguese Operation/procedure
Distributor Used to display the administrator password.
area
SEEG/ 22-8
English, German, Polish, Czech, Hungarian,
SEA/East
EEU Greek, Turkish, Russian, French, Italian, Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check
Europe, Purpose
Slovak (display/print)
etc.
SEF/ Function
English, German, French, Spanish, Dutch, Used to display the original, staple counter.
SEES/ (Purpose)
NEU Italian, Portuguese, Swedish, Norwegian, Item Counter
SEIS/SEN,
Finnish, Danish
etc. Operation/procedure
Simplified Chinese, American English,
CHN SOCC Each counter is displayed.
English, Japanese
SPF RSPF counter
Traditional Chinese (Local support),
TWN Taiwan SCAN Scan counter
American English, English
Saudi American English, English, French, Spanish, STAPLE Stapler counter
ARB
Arabia Hebrew (Local support), Arabic The counter display is in 7 digits.
English, Arabic, Persian, American English,
FAS Iran
French, Spanish
22-9
Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check
22-6 Purpose
(display/print)
Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check Function Used to check the number of use of each paper feed
Purpose
(display/print) (Purpose) section. (the number of prints)
Function Used to print each system setting, the account Section Paper feed
(Purpose) information, and the machine adjustment values. Item Counter
Item Data Setting/adjustment data
Operation/procedure
Operation/Procedure Used to display each paper feed counter.
(Initial screen) BYPASS Manual feed counter
The currently set value is highlighted beside the adjustment item. TRAY1 Tray 1 counter
1. Select the adjustment item with the 10-key. TRAY2 Tray 2 counter
2. Press the [START] key. TRAY3 Tray 3 counter
The display is shifted to the copy menu and the set value is stored. TRAY4 Tray 4 counter
3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density.
The counter display is in 7 digits.
4. Press the [START] key.
Copying is started.
After canceling a jam (After picking up, the [C] key is invalid.) 22-10
When the other information is repeatedly printed, the display may show Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check
the message, “Remove original from original table.” However, the Purpose
(display/print)
operation is performed normally. Function
Used to check the system configulation.
Item Content (Purpose)
1 ALL All lists group print (Default) Item Specifications Option
2 SYSTEM SETTING System setting information list Operation/procedure
ACCOUNTING The detected machine composition is displayed.
3 List of total number of prints
COUNTERS (The job separator cannot be detected. Based on SIM 26-1 setting.)
4 AUDITOR NO. Department number list Item Display items
MACHINE SIM SPEED 26CPM/31CPM
5 Machine simulation setting list
SETTING DF NONE/[1: RSPF]
FAX simulation setting list (Only when OUTPUT NONE/[2: Finisher]/[3: Job separator]
the FAX board is installed. The display CASETTE1 NONE/[4: One-step paper feed unit]
6 FAX SIM SETTING*1
does not go to the print data transfer CASETTE2 NONE/[5: Two-step paper feed unit]
display, but to the FAX SIM menu.) IMC MEM NONE/Expansion memory capacity (MB)
PRINTER NONE/[6: PRINTER]
* When the IMC board is not installed, key input is disabled.
PS3 NONE/[7: PS3]
* Duplex print cannot be made. NIC NONE/[8: NIC]
* For the FAX SIM setting list, the display and the operating proce- SCANNER NONE/[9: SCANNER]
dures differ. FAX NONE/[10: FAX]
FAX MEM NONE/Memory capacity (MB)
Note: When the simulation is canceled, the display returns to the origi-
HAND SET NONE/[11: Handset]
nal state but the machine is not reset.
USB HOST NONE/USB HOST

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 14
Item Display items Paper Reached/
ICCARDR/W NONE/MX-ECX2 Error code Name Sensor name Not Reached to
NONE: When it is not installed, “- - - - - - - - - -” is displayed. the sensor
SPF P-OUT
[ ]: Shows the product code in the list below. Reached
RSPF long size sensor
No. Item Model code ORG_LONG
error SPF P-IN
1 RSPF MX-RP10 Reached
sensor
2 Finisher MX-FN13
3 Job separator MX-TR11
4 1 tray paper feed unit MX-DE10 (*1)
22-13
5 2 tray paper feed unit MX-DE11 (*1)
6 PRINTER MX-PB12 Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check
Purpose
7 PS3 MX-PK10 (display/print)
8 NIC STANDARD (Only SoftNic) Function
Used to display the CRUM type.
9 SCANNER MX-NSX1 (Purpose)
10 FAX AR-FX7 Item Specifications
11 Handset AR-HN4
Operation/Procedure
*1: The number of installed units is displayed beside the model code. Used to display the CRUM type.
For the tray, only the option tray is displayed. Item Content
00 Not fixed.
01 AR-A
22-11
02 AR-B
Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check 03 AR-C
Purpose
(display/print) 04 China
Function Used to display the FAX send/receive counter 05 Japan
(Purpose) (FAX reception and print counter).
99 Conversion completed.
Section FAX
Item Counter
Operation/procedure 22-19
Used to display the FAX send/receive counter. Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check
Purpose
FAX SEND PAGE/TIME FAX send page and time (display/print)
FAX RECEIVE PAGE/TIME FAX receive page and time Function Used to display the scanner counter in the network
FAX OUTPUT FAX output (number of print) (Purpose) scanner mode.
Section Network scanner
The counter display is in 8 digits.
Item Counter
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.
Operation/procedure
22-12 Used to display the scanner counter.
SCANMODE Scanner mode counter
Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check
Purpose
(display/print) The counter display is in 7 digits.
Used to check the misfeed positions and the number of
Function misfeed at each position.
(Purpose) (When the number of misfeed is considerably great, it
can be judged as necessary for repair.) 24
Section RSPF
Item Trouble Misfeed
24-1
Operation/procedure
Purpose Data clear
Used to display the RSPF jam history data sequentially from the latest Used to clear the misfeed counter, the misfeed history,
one. Function
the trouble counter, and the trouble history. (The
Forty RSPF jam histories are displayed sequentially from the latest. (Purpose)
counters are cleared after completion of maintenance.)
Paper Reached/ Section Memory
Error code Name Sensor name Not Reached to Item Counter
the sensor
Operation/procedure
RSPF paper in lead SPF P-IN
DFD_ND Not Reached Jam/trouble counter is cleared individually. (The history of each
edge jam sensor
counter is deleted when clearing)
RSPF paper in rear SPF P-IN
DFD_ST Reached 1. Select the counter to be cleared with the 10-key.
edge jam sensor
Reached, 2. Press the [START] key.
RSPF paper out SPF P-IN The confirmation menu is shown.
RDD_ND P_OUT Not
lead edge jam sensor
Reached 3. Select “1: YES.”
RSPF paper out SPF P-OUT Reached, P_IN 1: YES (Cleared)
RDD_ST
rear edge jam sensor passed (OFF) 2: NO (Not cleared) (Default)
Not Reached Item Content
RSPF duplex SPF P-IN
JAM_REV (Paper after 1 JAM JAM counter/JAM history
reverse jam sensor
reversing) 2 SPF JAM RSPF JAM counter/RSPF JAM history
RSPF short size SPF P-IN Passed (OFF at 3 TROUBLE Trouble counter/Trouble history
ORG_SHORT
error sensor JAM)

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 15
24-2 24-5
Purpose Data clear Purpose Data clear
Function Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) Function Used to reset the developer counter. (The developer
(Purpose) of each paper feed section. (Purpose) counter of the DV unit which is installed is reset.)
Section Paper feed Section Image process
Item Counter (Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/procedure Developer/Toner hopper
Item Counter Developer
Used to clear each paper feed counter individually.
1. Select the counter to be cleared with the 10-key. Operation/procedure
2. Press the [START] key. The confirmation menu is shown. After execution of SIM25-2, this counter is cleared.
3. Select “1: YES.” 1. Press the [START] key.
The confirmation menu is shown.
1: YES (Cleared)
2: NO (Not cleared) (Default) 2. Select “1: YES.”

Item Content 1: YES (Cleared)


2: NO (Not cleared) (Default)
1 BYPASS Manual feed counter
2 TRAY1 Tray 1 counter
3 TRAY2 Tray 2 counter 24-6
4 TRAY3 Tray 3 counter
Purpose Data clear
5 TRAY4 Tray 4 counter
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the copy counter.
Item Counter Copier
24-3 Operation/procedure
Purpose Data clear 1. Press the [START] key.
Function Used to clear the number usage data of the stapler, The confirmation menu is shown.
(Purpose) RSPF, and scanning. 2. Select “1: YES.”
Section Transport/Finisher 1: YES (Cleared)
Item Counter 2: NO (Not cleared) (Default)
Operation/procedure
Used to clear the original and staple counters individually. 24-7
1. Select the counter to be cleared with the 10-key. Purpose Data clear
2. Press the [START] key. Used to clear the OPC drum (membrane decrease)
Function
The confirmation menu is shown. correction counter. (This simulation is executed when
(Purpose)
3. Select “1: YES.” the OPC drum is replaced.)
Image process
1: YES (Cleared)
Section (Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
2: NO (Not cleared) (Default)
Photo conductor
Item Content
1 SPF RSPF counter Item Counter
2 SCAN Scan counter Operation/procedure
3 STAPLE Stapler counter 1. Press the [START] key.
The confirmation menu is shown.
2. Select “1: YES.”
24-4
1: YES (Cleared)
Purpose Data clear 2: NO (Not cleared) (Default)
Function (Purpose) Used to reset the maintenance counter.
Item Counter
24-9
Operation/procedure
Purpose Data clear
1. Press the [START] key. The confirmation menu is shown. Function
2. Select “1: YES.” Used to clear the printer counter and other counters.
(Purpose)
1: YES (Cleared) Section Printer
2: NO (Not cleared) (Default) Item Counter Printer
Operation/procedure
1. Select the counter to be cleared with the 10-key.
2. Press the [START] key.
The confirmation menu is shown.
3. Select “1: YES.”
1: YES (Cleared)
2: NO (Not cleared) (Default)
Item Content
1 PRINTER Printer counter
2 IMC IMC counter
3 DUPLEX DUPLEX counter
4 OTHERS The other counters

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 16
24-10 25-2
Purpose Data clear Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) FAX counter data clear Function Used to make the initial setting of toner concentration
Section FAX (Purpose) when replacing developer.
Item Counter Image process
Operation/procedure Section (Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Developer/Toner hopper
1. Select a counter to be cleared with the 10 key.
2. Select “1: YES.” Operation/procedure

1: YES (Cleared) After execution, the developer counter is cleared.


2: NO (Not cleared) (Default) 1) Open the cover with the power OFF.
Item Content 2) Turn on the power. (Since the cover is open, the machine does not
FAX SEND perform initializing.)
1 FAX send page and time
(PAGE & TIME) 3) Execute the simulation.
FAX RECEIVE 4) Enter SIM 25-2. ([25] → [START] key → [2] → [START] key)
2 FAX receive page and time
(PAGE & TIME) 5) Close the cover just before starting the simulation.
3 FAX OUTPUT FAX output (number of prints)
6) Press the [START] key.
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed. The main motor rotates. After stirring for 3 min, the toner density
control sensor value is sampled 16 times, and the average value is
24-15 stored.
When “EE-EU” or “EE-EL” after completion, an error display is shown.
Purpose Data clear
Function Used to clear the scanner counter in the network Note: After completion of execution, be sure to press the [CA] key to
cancel the simulation.
(Purpose) scanner mode.
Section Scanner section
Item Counter
Operation/procedure
26
1. Press the [START] key.
The confirmation menu is shown. 26-1
2. Select “1: YES.” Purpose Setting
1: YES (Cleared) Used to set whether the job separator is installed or
Function
2: NO (Not cleared) (Default) not. (Since this cannot be detected by hardware
(Purpose)
The scanner mode counter and the number of send of the scanner are detection, it is set in this simulation.)
cleared. Item Specifications Option
* The simulation to perform communication with the PCL is inhibited Operation/procedure
until Notice Page storing is completed. (Only when the serviceman
1. Select the set value with the 10-key.
call error occurs.)
2. Press the [START] key.
* When in other than the serviceman call error, entering the simulation
is not allowed from the system check display. Set value Connection option
0 None (default)
1 Job separator provided.

25
26-2
25-1
Purpose Setting
Purpose Operation test/check Function Used to set whether the automatic detection of paper
Used to check the operation of the main drive (Purpose) size is made or not.
Function (excluding the scanner section) and to check the Section Paper feed
(Purpose) operation of the toner concentration sensor. (The toner Item Specifications
concentration sensor output can be monitored.)
Operation/procedure
Section DRIVE
Item Operation 1. Select the item with the 10-key and press the [START] key.
Used to set the automatic size detection.
Operation/procedure 2. Set whether automatic detection of paper size is made or not with
1. Press the [START] key. the 10-key.
The main motor rotates to start monitoring the toner density control Setting to detect B4/Legal as FC
sensor. (3min operation) 1:B4/LG,FC 0: B4 legal is detected as B4 legal. (Default)
* Even in toner end error, if there is no other error (including cover 1: B4 legal is detected as FC.
open) after turning on the power, this simulation can be performed. This setup detects Letter as A4 in the inch series and
A4 as Letter in the AB series.
2:A4<->LT
0: Detection disable (Default)
1: Detection valid
8.5” x 13” detection valid/invalid setup
Set value Setup Remarks
0 Detection invalid Default
1 Detection valid

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 17
Detection size when 8.5” x 13” document/paper is used. Operation/procedure
Set value Select the mode corresponding to the auditor specification mode with
Employed Destina Document
0 1 the 10-key.
unit tion size
(Invalid) (Valid)
FC FC Setting
B4 Item Content Default
(8.5” x 13”) (8.5” x 13”) range
AB LG FC 0 P10 Built-in auditor mode
B4
series (8.5” x 14”) (8.5” x 13”) 1 VENDOR Coin vendor mode 0-2 0
FC
Document B4 B4 2 OTHER Others
Docu (8.5” x 13”)
table/
ment FC LG FC When “1: VENDOR (Coin vendor mode)” is set, the following three
RSPF
(8.5” x 13”) (8.5” x 14”) (8.5” x 13”) items of system setting are changed.
Inch LG LG FC 1) Set the LCD backlight change inhibit to “1: OFF (Enable).”
series (8.5” x 14”) (8.5” x 14”) (8.5” x 13”)
2) When SIM 26-6 destination setting is set to “0: Japan,” duplex copy
WLT WLT
B4 inhibit setting must be set to “0: ON (Inhibit).”
(11” x 17”) (11” x 17”)
Machine All 3) Set the sort automatic selection to “0: OFF (Disable).”
paper feed destina – Set with system setting.
tray tions
FC LG FC 26-5
(8.5” x 13”) (8.5” x 14”) (8.5” x 13”)
AB Purpose Setting
LG LG FC
series Function Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the
Paper (8.5” x 14”) (8.5” x 14”) (8.5” x 13”)
Manual (Purpose) maintenance counter.
B4 B4 B4
paper feed Item Specifications Counter
FC LG FC
tray
(8.5” x 13”) (8.5” x 14”) (8.5” x 13”) Operation/procedure
Inch
LG LG FC
series Used to set the count up number (1 or 2) when an A3/WLT paper
(8.5” x 14”) (8.5” x 14”) (8.5” x 13”)
passes through.
B4 B4 B4
For the drum counter and the developer counter, double count is
A4/LT (8.5” x 11”) detection enable/disable setup employed unconditionally.
In the inch series, Letter is detected as A4; in the AB series, A4 is (Target counter selection)
detected as Letter.
Item Content
Set value Setup Remarks
1 TOTAL COUNTER Total counter
0 Detection invalid Default
1 Detection valid 2 MAINTENANCE COUNTER Maintenance counter

Detection size when A4/LT (8.5” x 11”) document/paper is used. Used to set the count up number of the selected counter.
Set value Item Content Setting range Default
Employed Destina Document
0 1 1 SINGLE COUNT Single count
unit tion size 1-2 2
(Invalid) (Valid) 2 DOUBLE COUNT Double count
LT
A4 A4
AB (8.5” x 11”)
series LT LT
Document A4 26-6
Docu (8.5” x 11”) (8.5” x 11”)
table/
ment LT Purpose Setting
RSPF A4 A4
Inch (8.5” x 11”) Function Used to set the specifications depending on the
series LT LT (Purpose) destination.
A4
(8.5” x 11”) (8.5” x 11”) Item Specifications Destination
Machine All
paper feed destina – Set with system setting. Operation/procedure
tray tions Select the destination with the 10-key.
Paper
Manual All By changing the destination, some other setting items may be changed.
Regardless of the
paper feed destina – Setting
simulation setup.
tray tions Item Content Default
range
0 JAPAN Japan
1 SEC SEC
26-3
2 SECL SECL
Purpose Setting 3 SEEG SEEG
Used to set the specifications of the auditor. 4 SUK SUK
Function
Setting must be made depending on the use condition 5 SCA SCA
(Purpose)
of the auditor. 6 SEF SEF
Section Auditor 7 INEG EX inch series 0-14 0
Item Specifications 8 ABEG EX AB series
9 INEF EX inch series (FC)
10 ABEF EX AB series (FC)
11 CHINESE China
12 TAIWAN Taiwan AB
13 SEEG2 SEEG2
14 TAIWAN2 Taiwan China

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 18
26-12 Item Remarks
9 PORTUGUESE
Purpose Setting 10 TURKISH
Function 11 GREEK
Used to input the Software Key for E-MAIL RIC.
(Purpose) 12 POLISH
Section E-MAIL RIC 13 HUNGARIAN
Item Specifications 14 CZECH
Operation/procedure 15 RUSSIAN
16 FINNISH
The current setup is displayed with ON or OFF.
17 NORWEGIAN
Enter an input (20 digits) of the E-MAIL RIC soft key with the 10-key 18 DANISH
and press the [START] key, and the collating result is displayed with 19 CHINESE
OK or NG. 20 TAIWANESE Traditional Chinese supported locally
After canceling the simulation, if OK, the E-MAIL RIC function is 21 SLOVAK
enable; if NG, the E-MAIL RIC function is disabled. 22 HEBREW Supported locally
This setting must be reset after the simulation cancel. BRAZILIAN
23
PORTUGUESE
24 ARABIC
26-14 25 FARSI
Purpose Setting
Function 26-30
Used to input the Software Key for the PS extention kit.
(Purpose)
Purpose Setting
Section Printer
Function Used to set ON/OFF of the heater lamp slow-up control
Item Specifications
(Purpose) conforming to the CE mark control.
Operation/procedure Item Specifications Operation mode (Common)
The current setup is displayed with ON or OFF. Operation/procedure
Enter an input (20 digits) of the PS expansion kit soft key with the 10- Input the set value with the 10-key and press the [START] key.
key and press the [START] key, and the collating result is displayed
This setup varies in connection with SIM 26-6 (Destination setup).
with OK or NG.
After canceling the simulation, if OK, the PS expansion kit function is Default
Item
enable; if NG, the PS expansion kit function is disabled. U.S.A, Canada, Australia, France, Taiwan Others
This setting must be reset after the simulation cancel. 0 OFF
0 1
1 ON
Note: Executable only when the PCL/PS3 is installed.

26-18 26-35
Purpose Setting Purpose Setup
Function Used to set whether the same continuous troubles are
Used to set enable/disable of toner save operation. Function
(Purpose) displayed as one trouble or the series of troubles with
Item Specifications Operation mode (Common) (Purpose)
SIM 22-4 when the same troubles occur continuously.
Operation/procedure Item Specifications
Input the set value with the 10-key and press the [START] key. Operation/procedure
Setting Enter the set value with 10-key, and press [START] key.
Item Content Default
range
Item Content Default
0 OFF Disable
0-1 1 When two or more troubles occur, only one is
1 ON Enable 0 ONCE
registered. 0
1 ANY All the troubles occurred are registered.
26-22
Purpose Setting 26-36
Function Used to set the specification (language display) for the Purpose Setting
(Purpose) destination. Function Used to set whether the machine is stopped or not
Item Specifications (Purpose) when the maintenance counter life is expired.
Operation/procedure Item Operation
Select the display language with the 10-key, and press the [START] Operation/procedure
key. Input the set value with the 10-key and press the [START] key.
This setup varies in connection with SIM 26-6 (Destination setup).
Item Content Default
Item Remarks 0 STOP Stop
0 JAPANESE 1
1 NON STOP Non stop
1 ENG.US
2 ENG.UK
3 FRENCH
4 GERMAN
5 ITALY
6 DUTCH
7 SWEDISH
8 SPANISH

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 19
26-37 26-57
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function Used to set whether the machine is stopped or not Function (Purpose) Used to set the model code.
(Purpose) when the developer counter life is expired. Item Operation
Item Operation Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure Input the set value with the 10-key and press the [START] key.
Input the set value with the 10-key and press the [START] key. Item
Item Content Default 1 AR-5726
0 STOP Stop 2 AR-5731
1
1 NON STOP Non stop

26-60
26-38 Purpose Setting
Used to set enable/disable of the FAX mode key when
Purpose Setting Function
FAX is not installed. (When FAX is installed, the FAX
Function Used to set whether the machine is stopped or not (Purpose)
mode is enabled regardless of this setup.)
(Purpose) when the drum counter life is expired.
Item Operation
Item Operation
Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure
Input the set value with the 10-key and press the [START] key.
Input the set value with the 10-key and press the [START] key.
Default
Item Content Default Item Content U.S.A, Canada,
Others
0 STOP Stop U.K., Australia
1
1 NON STOP Non stop Effective (The message with
0 ON
FAX uninstalled is displayed.) 0 1
1 OFF Disable (Error Beep)
26-50 This setup varies in connection with SIM 26-6 (Destination setup).
Purpose Setting
Function Used to set ON/OFF of the black and white reversion
26-69
(Purpose) function.
Item Operation Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Toner near end setting
Operation/procedure
Item Operation
Enter the set value with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
Operation/procedure
Item Content Default
0 ON Enable 1 (U.K.) Item Set value Default
1 OFF Disable 0 (Others) 1 Toner preparation 0: Displayed 0
message display 1: Not displayed
setting.
26-56 2 Toner near end 0: Displayed 0
massage display 1: Not displayed
Purpose Setting setting.
Function (Purpose) Gamma life correction setting 3 Toner end status 1: Operate 3
Item Operation operation setting. 2: Operate (However, if
Operation/procedure CRUM ID matches, not
operates.)
Sets enable/disable of the gamma life correction function.
3: Not operate
Item Set value Default 4 E-mail alert sending 0: When the near near 1
1 AE (Japan) 0 timing setting. toner end, the toner low
2 AE (Ex Japan) 0 status is sent.
3 Text 1 1: When the near toner
4 Text/Photo 1 end, the toner low
5 Photo (Error diffusion) 0: Disable 1 status is sent.
6 Photo (Dither) 1: Enable 1
7 T/S AE (Japan) 0
8 T/S AE (Ex Japan) 0
9 T/S Text 1
10 T/S Text/Photo 1

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 20
26-71 30-2
Purpose Setting Purpose Operation test/check
In the power save time setting, the pre-heat (pre-heat Used to display the status of the sensors attached to
mode setting) and the auto power shut off time can be Function the standard tray and the manual feed tray. (Use SIM
Function
set to the short time setup (pre-heat: 1 min, auto power (Purpose) 4-2 for the option trays.)
(Purpose)
shut off: 1 min) and the long time setup (pre-heat: The sensor of an uninstalled tray is not displayed.
5min, auto power shut off: 30min). Section Paper feed
Operation/procedure Item Operation
Select the short time setup or the long time setup of the pre-heat time Operation/procedure
and the auto power shut off time with the 10-key, and press the The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
[START] key.
PED1 1st tray paper empty sensor
Item Content Default LUD1 1st tray paper upper limit detection sensor
1 Preheat: 1min, auto power shut off: 1min CD1 1st tray empty sensor
1
2 Preheat: 5min, auto power shut off: 30min PED2 2nd tray paper empty sensor
LUD2 2nd tray paper upper limit detection sensor
Note: When the sub code 71 is entered to display the setting menu,the
CD2 2nd tray empty sensor
default values are always displayed. (However,the default time is
PFD2 2nd tray paper pass sensor
not always set.)
DSWR2 2nd tray right door detection sensor
MPED Manual tray paper empty detection
26-72 MPLS1 Manual tray length detection 1
Purpose Setting MPLS2 Manual tray length detection 2
MPLD1 Manual feed paper length detection 1
The letterhead support is set.
MPLD2 Manual feed paper length detection 2
Function When “Letterhead paper setting” is selected, the set
(Purpose) value of SIM 26-46 (Image output direction setting) is Width detection size of the manual feed tray (one of them is displayed.)
set to “Setting Enable” accordingly. A4/A3, LT/WLT, B5/B4, INV/LTR, A5/A4R, B5R, POSTCARD, EXTRA,
Operation/procedure 8K/16K
Input the set value with the 10-key and press the [START] key. (At detection, highlighted)
Setting
Item Content Default
range
0 OFF Letterhead paper is not set.
0-1 0 40
1 ON Letterhead paper is set.

40-1
Purpose Operation test/check
30 Function Used to check the sensor of the machine manual feed
(Purpose) tray.
30-1 Section Paper feed
Item Operation
Purpose Operation test/check
Function Used to display the sensor status attached to the Operation/procedure
(Purpose) machine. The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
Section Others MPLS1 Manual tray length detection 1
Item Operation MPLS2 Manual tray length detection 2
Operation/procedure MPLD1 Manual feed paper length detection 1
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted. MPLD2 Manual feed paper length detection 2
PPD1H PS paper detection 1 sensor Width detection size of the manual feed tray (one of them is displayed.)
PPD1L PS paper detection 2 sensor A4/A3, LT/WLT, B5/B4, INV/LTR, A5/A4R, B5R, POSTCARD, EXTRA,
PPD2 Fusing paper sensor 8K/16K
POD1 1st paper exit paper out sensor
DVCH Developing cartridge detection sensor 40-2
DRST Drum intial detection sensor
DSWR1 Interlock switch (side door) Purpose Adjustment
SFTHP Shifter home position sensor Function Used to adjust the manual paper feed tray paper width
POD2 2nd paper exit paper out sensor (Purpose) detector detection level.
TOPF 2nd paper exit full detection sensor Section Paper feed
DSWR0 2nd paper exit cover open/close detection sensor Item Operation
LOEMP 1st paper exit empty detection sensor Operation/procedure
DUP2 Reverse path paper sensor
The adjustment method is of the 4-point system. Set the guide to Max.
POD3 Right paper exit sensor (A3/WLetter) position, A4R/Letter R position, A5R/Invoice R position,
PTOPF Right paper exit full sensor and Min. position for adjustment.
1) Set A3/W Letter and fit the guide, then press the [START] key.
2) Set A4R/LetterR and fit the guide, then press the [START] key.
3) Set to A5R/INVOICE R and fit the guide, then press the [START]
key.
4) Narrow the guide at minimum, press the [START] key.
5) Set the paper detection width (+), and press the [START] key.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 21
6) Set the paper detection width (–), and press the [START] key. 41-3
If “FAILED” is displayed in procedure 1), 2), 3), or 4), it is NG of adjust-
Purpose Operation test/check
ment. Repeat the adjustment.
Used to check the light reception level and the
Yes MID-L ADJ.ON Function
Middle position adjustment L detection level of the original size detection photo
No MID-L ADJ.OFF (Purpose)
sensor.
Yes NID-S ADJ.ON Section Others
Middle position adjustment S
No MID-S ADJ.OFF Item Operation
Operation/procedure
40-3 The detection output level of each sensor is displayed in real time.

Purpose Adjustment Original cover state


OCSW Open: Highlighted display
Function The AD conversion value of manual feed width
(Purpose) detection is displayed. Close: Normal display
1 to 5 PD sensor detection level (Hexadecimal display)
Section Paper feed
Item Operation The value in [ ] shows the threshold value of 20 degree detection
adjustment. (Hexadecimal display)
Operation/procedure
For AB series, 1 to 5 is displayed, for inch series, 1 to 4.
The AD conversion value of manual feed width detection is displayed.

41-4
Purpose Adjustment
41 Function
Used to adjust the detection level of OC 20 degrees.
(Purpose)
41-1 Section Others
Purpose Operation test/check Item Operation
Function Used to check the document size detection photo Operation/procedure
(Purpose) sensor.
Set the OC cover at 20 degrees detection and press the [START] key.
Section Others
The detection output level of each sensor is displayed in real time.
Item Operation
Original cover state
Operation/procedure OCSW Open: Highlighted display
The operation status of the sensors and detectors in the original size Close: Normal display
detection section are displayed. The active sensors and detectors are 1 to 5 PD sensor detection level (Hexadecimal display)
highlighted.
The value in [ ] shows the threshold value of 20 degree detection
Original cover state adjustment. (Hexadecimal display)
OCSW Open: Highlighted display
For AB series, 1 to 5 is displayed, for inch series, 1 to 4.
Close: Normal display
Original sensor status During execution, [EXECUTING] is highlighted.
PD1 to 5 Without original: Normal display
With original: Highlighted display
For AB series, PD1 to 5 is displayed, for inch series, PD1 to 4.
43
41-2 43-1

Purpose Adjustment Purpose Setting


Function Used to adjust the detection level of the document size Function
Used to set the fusing temperature.
(Purpose) photo sensor. (Purpose)
Section Others Section Fixing (Fusing)
Item Operation Item Operation

Operation/procedure Operation/procedure
Place an A3 (or WLT) document on the document table, and press 1. Touch the item to be set.
[START] key with the OC cover open. 2. Enter the set value with the 10-key.
The adjustment is performed and the result is displayed. Setting Default
Item Content
Original cover state range (Others) (Europe)
OCSW Open: Highlighted display Ready Ready
150 -
Close: Normal display 1 Temp Main temperature Main 185 190
220
1 to 5 PD sensor detection level (Hexadecimal display) (145) (145mm/s)
Ready Ready
The value in [ ] shows the threshold value. (Hexadecimal display) 150 -
2 Temp Sub temperature Sub 180 185
For AB series, 1 to 5 is displayed, for inch series, 1 to 4. 220
(145) (145mm/s)
During execution of the simulation, “EXECUTING” is displayed.
Ready Ready
150 -
3 Temp Main temperature Main 175 180
220
(122) (122mm/s)
Ready Ready
150 -
4 Temp Sub temperature Sub 170 175
220
(122) (122mm/s)

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 22
Setting Default 43-10
Item Content
range (Others) (Europe)
Purpose Setting
WarmUp Warmup target Function Used to set the paper feed cycle timing when printing
150 -
5 Target Main temperature Main 180 190 (Purpose) postcards.
220
(145) (145mm/s)
Section Paper feed
WarmUp Warmup target Item Operation
150 -
6 Target Sub temperature Sub 180 190
220 Operation/procedure
(145) (145mm/s)
WarmUp Warmup target Input the set value with the 10-key and press the [START] key.
150 -
7 Target Main temperature Main 175 Setting range 1-99
220
(122) (122mm/s) Default 50
WarmUp Warmup target
150 -
8 Target Sub temperature Sub 170
220
(122) (122mm/s)
WarmUp Warmup 44
Temp Main complete
9 0 - 40 10
(145) temperature Main
44-1
(145mm/s)
WarmUp Warmup Purpose Setting
Temp Sub complete Function Used to make various setups in each mode of process
10 0 - 40 15
(145) temperature Sub (Purpose) control.
(145mm/s) Image process
Section
WarmUp Warmup (Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Temp Main complete Item Operation
11 0 - 40 10
(122) temperature Main
Operation/procedure
(122mm/s)
Enter the set value with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
WarmUp Warmup
Temp Sub complete Item Content Default
12 0 - 40 15 ENVIRONMENT Environmental correction Allow/
(122) temperature Sub 1 1
(122mm/s) ADJ. Inhibit (0: Inhibit, 1: Allow)
600dpi 600dpi Main 150 - Duplex print correction Allow/
13 190 195 2 DUPLEX PRINT ADJ. 0
Main (145) (145mm/s) 220 Inhibit (0: Inhibit, 1: Allow)
600dpi Sub 600dpi Sub 150 - Transfer current enviroment
14 190 195 ENVIROMENT ADJ
(145) (145mm/s) 220 3 correction Allow/Innibit 0
(TC)
POST Postcard Main (0: Inhibit, 1: Allow)
150 -
15 CARD (145mm/s) 200
220
Main (145)
POST Postcard Sub 44-2
150 -
16 CARD Sub (145mm/s) 200 Purpose Setting
220
(145)
Function
CARDBOA Thick paper Main Drum life correction setting
150 - (Purpose)
17 RD Main (145mm/s) 200
220 Section Image process (Photoconductor)
(145)
Item Operation
CARDBOA Thick paper Sub
150 -
18 RD Sub (145mm/s) 200 Operation/procedure
220
(145) 1. Select an item with 10-key, and press [START] key.
600dpi 600dpi Main 150 - 2. Enter the setting value, and press [START] key.
19 175 185
Main (122) (122mm/s) 220
Item Content Default
600dpi Sub 600dpi Sub 150 -
20 175 185 Drum life correction Disable/
(122) (122mm/s) 220 GRIDBIAS
1 Enable 1
CARDBOA Postcard Main ADJUST
150 - (0: Disable, 1: Enable)
21 RD Main (122mm/s) 190
220
(122)
POST Postcard Sub
150 -
22 CARD Sub (122mm/s) 190 44-3
220
(122) Purpose Setting
POST Thick paper Main
150 - Function
23 CARD (122mm/s) 190 Used to set the DV count correction.
220 (Purpose)
(122mm/s)
Image process
CARDBOA Thick paper Sub Section
150 - (Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
24 RD Sub (122mm/s) 190
220 Item Operation
(122)

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 23
Operation/procedure Setting
Item Default
1. Select an item with 10-key, and press [START] key. range
2. Enter the setting value, and press [START] key. 6 465001 - 857313 (31-sheet model) 1-99 45
Item Content Default 7 857314 - 1714625 (31-sheet model) 1-99 45
DV count correction Disable/ 8 1714626 - 2571938 (31-sheet model) 1-99 45
1 PR_LIFE_ADJUST Enable 1 9 2571939 - 3429250 (31-sheet model) 1-99 45
(0: Disable, 1: Enable) 10 3429251 - 4286563 (31-sheet model) 1-99 45
Life of toner control DV 11 4286564 - 5143875 (31-sheet model) 1-99 45
2 TN_LIFE_ADJUST correction Disable/Enable 1 12 5143876 - 6001188 (31-sheet model) 1-99 45
(0: Disable, 1: Enable) 13 6001189 - 6858500 (31-sheet model) 1-99 45
Printing rate correction 14 6858501 - 7715813 (31-sheet model) 1-99 45
3 RATE_ADJUST Disable/Enable 1 15 7715814 - 8573125 (31-sheet model) 1-99 45
(0: Disable, 1: Enable) 16 8573126 - 9430438 (31-sheet model) 1-99 45
Toner unconditionally supply 17 9430439 - 10287750 (31-sheet model) 1-99 45
4 TONER_ADJUST correction Disable/Enable 1 18 10287751 - 11145063 (31-sheet model) 1-99 45
(0: Disable, 1: Enable)
19 11145064 - 12002375 (31-sheet model) 1-99 45
20 12002376 - (31-sheet model) 1-99 45
44-9 21 0 - 93000 (26-sheet model) 1-99 45
22 93001 - 186000 (26-sheet model) 1-99 45
Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/Check 23 186001 - 279000 (26-sheet model) 1-99 45
Purpose
(Display/Print)
24 279001 - 372000 (26-sheet model) 1-99 45
Function Used to display the process control correction 25 372001 - 465000 (26-sheet model) 1-99 45
(Purpose) information.
26 465001 - 857313 (26-sheet model) 1-99 45
Image process 27 857314 - 1714625 (26-sheet model) 1-99 45
Section
(Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
28 1714626 - 2571938 (26-sheet model) 1-99 45
Item Operation 29 2571939 - 3429250 (26-sheet model) 1-99 45
Operation/procedure 30 3429251 - 4286563 (26-sheet model) 1-99 45
Used to display the process control correction information. 31 4286564 - 5143875 (26-sheet model) 1-99 45
32 5143876 - 6001188 (26-sheet model) 1-99 45
33 6001189 - 6858500 (26-sheet model) 1-99 45
44-14
34 6858501 - 7715813 (26-sheet model) 1-99 45
Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/Check 35 7715814 - 8573125 (26-sheet model) 1-99 45
Purpose
(Display/Print) 36 8573126 - 9430438 (26-sheet model) 1-99 45
Function Used to display the environment (temperature, 37 9430439 - 10287750 (26-sheet model) 1-99 45
(Purpose) humidity) correction information. 38 10287751 - 11145063 (26-sheet model) 1-99 45
Item Operation 39 11145064 - 12002375 (26-sheet model) 1-99 45
40 12002376 - (26-sheet model) 1-99 45
Operation/procedure
The following data are displayed.
TH AREA Current environment area 44-17
TMP DATA Detection temperature of sensor (C°) Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/Check
Purpose
HUD DATA Detection humidity of sensor (%) (Display/Print)
Function Used to display the toner density control reference
* The value before entry of SIM is displayed. (It is not revised in real (Purpose) value.
time.) Image process
If sim entry is just after power turned on, the display value is all 0. Section
(Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Item Operation

44-16 Operation/procedure
The following data are displayed. (The displayed value is the previous
Purpose Setting
print correction value.)
Function
Used to set the toner density control correction value. TARGET Toner concentration control reference value
(Purpose)
DEV REF Developer adjustment value
Image process
Section LIFE Toner container life correction value (SIM 44-16)
(Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
TH Toner container environment correction value
Item Operation
TARGET = DEV REF+(LIFE-50)+(TH-50)
Operation/procedure
Developer adjustment value 128, life correction 60 (developer adjust-
Sets the toner density control correction value of the traveling distance
ment value plus 10), environment correction 45 (5 subtraction correc-
count.
tion), rapid toner supply correction = 128+(60-50)+(45-50) = 133.)
Setting
Item Default
range
1 0 - 93000 (31-sheet model) 1-99 45
2 93001 - 186000 (31-sheet model) 1-99 45
3 186001 - 279000 (31-sheet model) 1-99 45
4 279001 - 372000 (31-sheet model) 1-99 45
5 372001 - 465000 (31-sheet model) 1-99 45

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 24
44-34 Setting Default
Item Content
range *1 *2
Purpose Setting 145mm/s label paper > LTR
Function 21 +V1 LABEL (145) 5-30 5
Used to set the transfer current value in each mode. +V1
(Purpose) 145mm/s label paper > LTR
22 +V2 LABEL (145) 5-30 18
Operation/procedure +V2
1. Touch the item to be set. +V1 LABEL S 145mm/s label paper t LTR
23 5-30 5
(145) +V1
2. Enter the set value with the 10-key.
+V2 LABEL S 145mm/s label paper t LTR
To support an individual necessity in paper and the environment, it is 24 5-30 14
(145) +V2
variable in the range of 5 to 30uA in the increment of 1uA in each mode.
25 +V1 OHP (145) 145mm/s OHP > LTR +V1 5-30 5
When changing +V2, check with +V1 unchanged. If there is any trouble 26 +V2 OHP(145) 145mm/s OHP > LTR +V2 5-30 14
in the half tone image of graphics, keep the relationship between +V1 27 +V1 OHP S (145) 145mm/s OHP t LTR +V1 5-30 5
and +V2 at the default and change it. 28 +V2 OHP S (145) 145mm/s OHP t LTR +V2 5-30 18
When the image quality is deteriorated because the user selects the +V1 POSTCARD 145mm/s postcard/envelope
29 5-30 5
OHP mode and use other than the recommended OHP, decrease the (145) > 100mm +V1
transfer current to adjust deterioration of black background picture qual- +V2 POSTCARD 145mm/s postcard/envelope
30 5-30 26
ity. If some of characters are not printed, increase the transfer current. (145) > 100mm +V2
This setting is changed in linkage with SIM 26-6 destination setting. +V1 POSTCARD 145mm/s postcard/envelope
31 5-30 5
S (145) t 100mm +V1
*1: SECL/SCA/SEF/EX inch series/EX AB series/EX inch series (FC)/
+V2 POSTCARD 145mm/s postcard/envelope
EX AB series (FC)/China/Taiwan/SEEG2 32 5-30 26
S (145) t 100mm +V2
*2: SEC/SEEG/SUK 122mm/s normal paper W
Setting Default 33 +V1F (122) +V1 single surface. Duplex 5-30 5
Item Content
range *1 *2 (Front)
145mm/s normal paper W 122mm/s normal paper W
1 +V1F (145) +V1 single surface. Duplex 5-30 5 34 +V1R (122) 5-30 5
+V1 Duplex (Back)
(Front) 122mm/s normal paper W
145mm/s normal paper W 35 +V2F (122) +V2 single surface. Duplex 5-30 12 14
2 +V1R (145) 5-30 5
+V1 Duplex (Back) (Front)
145mm/s normal paper W 122mm/s normal paper W
3 +V2F (145) +V2 single surface. Duplex 5-30 18 20 36 +V2R (122) 5-30 12
+V2 Duplex (Back)
(Front) 122mm/s normal paper N1
145mm/s normal paper W 37 +V1S-F (122) +V1 single surface. Duplex 5-30 5
4 +V2R (145) 5-30 14 18
+V2 Duplex (Back) (Front)
145mm/s normal paper N1 122mm/s normal paper N1
5 +V1S-F (145) +V1 single surface. Duplex 5-30 5 38 +V1S-R (122) 5-30 5
+V1 Duplex (Back)
(Front) 122mm/s normal paper N1
145mm/s normal paper N1 39 +V2S-F (122) +V2 single surface. Duplex 5-30 14
6 +V1S-R (145) 5-30 5
+V1 Duplex (Back) (Front)
145mm/s normal paper N1 122mm/s normal paper N1
7 +V2S-F (145) +V2 single surface. Duplex 5-30 18 40 +V2S-R (122) 5-30 14
+V2 Duplex (Back)
(Front) 122mm/s normal paper N2
145mm/s normal paper N1 41 +V1SS-F (122) 5-30 5
8 +V2S-R (145) 5-30 18 +V2 Duplex (Back)
+V2 Duplex (Back) 122mm/s normal paper N2
145mm/s normal paper N2 42 +V1SS-R (122) +V1 single surface. Duplex 5-30 5
9 +V1SS-F (145) +V1 single surface. Duplex 5-30 5 (Front)
(Front) 122mm/s normal paper N2
145mm/s normal paper N2 43 +V2SS-F (122) 5-30 14
10 +V1SS-R (145) 5-30 5 +V1 Duplex (Back)
+V1 Duplex (Back) 122mm/s normal paper N2
145mm/s normal paper N2 44 +V2SS-R (122) +V2 single surface. Duplex 5-30 14
11 +V1SS-F (145) +V2 single surface. Duplex 5-30 18 (Front)
(Front) 122mm/s thick paper > LTR
145mm/s normal paper N2 45 +V1 THICK (122) 5-30 5
12 +V1SS-R (145) 5-30 18 +V1
+V2 Duplex (Back) 122mm/s thick paper > LTR
145mm/s thick paper > LTR 46 +V2 THICK (122) 5-30 10
13 +V1 THICK (145) 5-30 5 +V2
+V1 +V1 THICK S 122mm/s thick paper t LTR
145mm/s thick paper > LTR 47 5-30 5
14 +V2 THICK (145) 5-30 14 (122) +V1
+V2 +V2 THICK S 122mm/s thick paper t LTR
+V1 THICK S 145mm/s thick paper t LTR 48 5-30 12
15 5-30 5 (122) +V2
(145) +V1 122mm/s thin paper > LTR
+V2 THICK S 145mm/s thick paper t LTR 49 +V1 THIN (122) 5-30 5
16 5-30 14 +V1
(145) +V2 122mm/s thin paper > LTR
145mm/s thin paper > LTR 50 +V2 THIN (122) 5-30 12
17 +V1 THIN (145) 5-30 5 +V2
+V1 122mm/s thin paper t LTR
145mm/s thin paper > LTR 51 +V1 THIN S (122) 5-30 5
18 +V2 THIN (145) 5-30 18 +V1
+V2 122mm/s thin paper t LTR
145mm/s thin paper t LTR 52 +V2 THIN S (122) 5-30 12
19 +V1 THIN S (145) 5-30 5 +V2
+V1 122mm/s label paper > LTR
145mm/s thin paper t LTR 53 +V1 LABEL (122) 5-30 5
20 +V2 THIN S (145) 5-30 18 +V1
+V2 122mm/s label paper > LTR
54 +V2 LABEL (122) 5-30 12
+V2

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 25
Setting Default 46-9
Item Content
range *1 *2
Purpose Adjustment
+V1 LABEL S 122mm/s label paper t LTR
55 5-30 5 Used to adjust the shift amount and the inclination
(122) +V1 Function
+V2 LABEL S 122mm/s label paper t LTR value for each level (1 to 5) of the exposure mode
56 5-30 12 (Purpose)
(122) +V2 (Text).
57 +V1 OHP (122) 122mm/s OHP > LTR +V1 5-30 5 Item Picture quality Density
58 +V2 OHP (122) 122mm/s OHP > LTR +V2 5-30 8 Operation/procedure
59 +V1 OHP S (122) 122mm/s OHP t LTR +V1 5-30 5 1. Touch the item to be adjusted.
60 +V2 OHP S (122) 122mm/s OHP t LTR +V2 5-30 12 The adjustment item and the currently set value are highlighted.
+V1 POSTCARD 122mm/s postcard/envelope
61 5-30 5 2. Press the [START] key.
(122) > 100mm +V1
The display is shifted to the copy menu.
+V2 POSTCARD 122mm/s postcard/envelope
62 5-30 16 3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density.
(122) > 100mm +V2
+V1 POSTCARD 122mm/s postcard/envelope Use the 10-key to set the exposure level.
63 5-30 5 4. Press the [START] key.
S (122) t 100mm +V1
+V2 POSTCARD 122mm/s postcard/envelope Copying is started.
64 5-30 16
S (122) t 100mm +V2 (Exposure mode (Text))
Setting
Item Content Default
range
44-40 1 1.0 (SHIFT) Character level 1.0 (shift q’ty) 1-99 22
2 1.0 (GAMMA) Character level 1.0 (slant) 1-99 44
Purpose Setting
3 2.0 (SHIFT) Character level 2.0 (shift q’ty) 1-99 36
Used to set the time from the start of the main motor 4 2.0 (GAMMA) Character level 2.0 (slant) 1-99 47
Function
rotation (Ready) to the start of toner supply in previous
(Purpose) 5 3.0 (SHIFT) Character level 3.0 (shift q’ty) 1-99 50
rotation after turning on the power. 6 3.0 (GAMMA) Character level 3.0 (slant) 1-99 50
Operation/procedure 7 4.0 (SHIFT) Character level 4.0 (shift q’ty) 1-99 61
Enter the set value with the 10-key, and press the [START] key. 8 4.0 (GAMMA) Character level 4.0 (slant) 1-99 55
Set the toner supply previous rotation time. 9 5.0 (SHIFT) Character level 5.0 (shift q’ty) 1-99 72
10 5.0 (GAMMA) Character level 5.0 (slant) 1-99 60
Setting range 1-99 (sec) TS 1.0 Character (TS) level 1.0
Default 4 (sec) 11 1-99 22
(SHIFT) (shift q’ty)
1TS 1.0 Character (TS) level 1.0
12 1-99 44
(GAMMA) (slant)
TS 2.0 Character (TS) level 2.0
13 1-99 36
46 (SHIFT) (shift q’ty)
TS 2.0 Character (TS) level 2.0
14 1-99 47
(GAMMA) (slant)
46-2 TS 3.0 Character (TS) level 3.0
15 1-99 50
Purpose Adjustment (SHIFT) (shift q’ty)
TS 3.0 Character (TS) level 3.0
Function 16 1-99 50
Used to set the exposure level in each exposure mode. (GAMMA) (slant)
(Purpose)
TS 4.0 Character (TS) level 4.0
Item Picture quality Density 17 1-99 61
(SHIFT) (shift q’ty)
Operation/procedure TS 4.0 Character (TS) level 4.0
18 1-99 55
1. Touch the item to be adjusted. (Automatic adjustment) (GAMMA) (slant)
The currently set value is highlighted beside the adjustment item. TS 5.0 Character (TS) level 5.0
19 1-99 72
2. Press the [START] key. (SHIFT) (shift q’ty)
The display is shifted to the copy menu. TS 5.0 Character (TS) level 5.0
20 1-99 60
(GAMMA) (slant)
3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density.
Use the 10-key to set the exposure level. Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display returns to the initial
4. Press the [START] key. menu but the machine is not reset.
Copying is started.
(Exposure mode)
46-10
Setting
Item Content Default Purpose Adjustment
range
1 AE AE Used to adjust the shift amount and the inclination
Function
2 TEXT Character Level 3.0 value for each level (1 to 5) of the exposure mode
(Purpose)
(Text/Photo).
3 TEXT/PHOTO Character/Photo Level 3.0
Item Picture quality
4 PHOTO Photo Level 3.0 1-99 50
5 AE(TS) AE (TS) Operation/procedure
6 TEXT(TS) Character (TS) Level 3.0 1. Touch the item to be adjusted.
7 TEXT/PHOTO(TS) Character/Photo (TS) Level 3.0 The adjustment item and the currently set value are highlighted.
2. Press the [START] key.
* Except for AE and AE (TS), only Level 3 can be set.
The display is shifted to the copy menu.
Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display returns to the initial
3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density.
menu but the machine is not reset.
Use the 10-key to set the exposure level.
4. Press the [START] key.
Copying is started.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 26
(Exposure mode (Text/Photo)) (Exposure mode (Photo))
Setting Setting
Item Content Default Item Content Default
range range
Character/Photo level 1.0 1 1.0(SHIFT) Photo level 1.0 (shift q’ty) 16
1 1.0 (SHIFT) 1-99 30 2 1.0(GAMMA) Photo level 1.0 (slant) 50
(shift q’ty)
Character/Photo level 1.0 3 2.0(SHIFT) Photo level 2.0 (shift q’ty) 33
2 1.0 (GAMMA) 1-99 37 4 2.0(GAMMA) Photo level 2.0 (slant) 50
(slant)
5 3.0(SHIFT) Photo level 3.0 (shift q’ty) 50
Character/Photo level 2.0 1-99
3 2.0 (SHIFT) 1-99 40 6 3.0(GAMMA) Photo level 3.0 (slant) 50
(shift q’ty)
7 4.0(SHIFT) Photo level 4.0 (shift q’ty) 56
Character/Photo level 2.0
4 2.0 (GAMMA) 1-99 43 8 4.0(GAMMA) Photo level 4.0 (slant) 61
(slant)
9 5.0(SHIFT) Photo level 5.0 (shift q’ty) 62
Character/Photo level 3.0 10 5.0(GAMMA) Photo level 5.0 (slant) 66
5 3.0 (SHIFT) 1-99 50
(shift q’ty)
Character/Photo level 3.0 Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display returns to the initial
6 3.0 (GAMMA) 1-99 50 menu but the machine is not reset.
(slant)
Character/Photo level 4.0
7 4.0 (SHIFT) 1-99 57
(shift q’ty) 46-12
Character/Photo level 4.0
8 4.0 (GAMMA) 1-99 61 Purpose Adjustment
(slant)
Function FAX exposure level adjustment
Character/Photo level 5.0
9 5.0 (SHIFT) 1-99 64 (Purpose) (1 mode automatic adjustment)
(shift q’ty)
Section FAX
Character/Photo level 5.0
10 5.0 (GAMMA) 1-99 66 Item Image quality
(slant)
TS 1.0 Character/Photo (TS) level 1.0 Operation/procedure
11 1-99 30
(SHIFT) (shift q’ty) 1. Select “1: COPY START.”
TS 1.0 Character/Photo (TS) level 1.0 The currently set value is displayed beside the item.
12 1-99 37
(GAMMA) (slant) 2. Enter the set value of the exposure level with the 10-key, and
TS 2.0 Character/Photo (TS) level 2.0 press the [#/P] key.
13 1-99 40
(SHIFT) (shift q’ty) 3. Press the [START] key.
TS 2.0 Character/Photo (TS) level 2.0 Copying is started and the set value is stored.
14 1-99 43
(GAMMA) (slant)
Normal display NOW PRINTING
TS 3.0 Character/Photo (TS) level 3.0 DOOR OPEN
15 1-99 50
(SHIFT) (shift q’ty) Error display JAM
TS 3.0 Character/Photo (TS) level 3.0 PAPER EMPTY
16 1-99 50
(GAMMA) (slant)
TS 4.0 Character/Photo (TS) level 4.0 There is no tray selection operation.
17 1-99 57 The optimum paper tray for the scanned size is selected.
(SHIFT) (shift q’ty)
TS 4.0 Character/Photo (TS) level 4.0 Item Setting range Default
18 1-99 61 1 COPY START – –
(GAMMA) (slant)
TS 5.0 Character/Photo (TS) level 5.0 2 FAX EXP.LEVEL 0-99 50
19 1-99 64
(SHIFT) (shift q’ty) Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.
TS 5.0 Character/Photo (TS) level 5.0
20 1-99 66
(GAMMA) (slant) 46-13
Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display returns to the initial
Purpose Adjustment
menu but the machine is not reset.
Function FAX exposure level adjustment
(Purpose) (Normal mode individual adjustment)
46-11 Section FAX
Purpose Adjustment Item Image quality
Used to adjust the shift amount and the inclination
Function Operation/procedure
value for each level (1 to 5) of the exposure mode
(Purpose) The currently set value is highlighted beside the item.
(Photo).
Item Picture quality Density 1. Select an item to be adjusted.
Operation/procedure 2. Enter the set value of the exposure level with the 10-key.
1. Touch the item to be adjusted. 3. Press the [START] key.
The adjustment item and the currently set value are highlighted. Copying is started and the set value is stored.
2. Press the [START] key. Normal display NOW PRINTING
The display is shifted to the copy menu. DOOR OPEN
Error display JAM
3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density.
PAPER EMPTY
Use the 10-key to set the exposure level.
4. Press the [START] key. There is no tray selection operation.
Copying is started. The optimum paper tray for the scanned size is selected.
Item Content Setting range Default
1 COPY START Copy start – –
2 EXP.LEVEL Exposure level selection
3 AE Normal text AE 0-99 50
4 MANUAL Normal text MANUAL
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 27
46-14 46-16
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Adjustment
Function FAX exposure level adjustment Function FAX exposure level adjustment
(Purpose) (Fine text mode individual adjustment) (Purpose) (Ultra Fine mode individual adjustment)
Section FAX Section FAX
Item Image quality Item Image quality
Operation/procedure Operation/procedure
1. Select “1: COPY START.” The currently set value is highlighted beside the item.
The currently set value is displayed beside the item. 1. Select an item to be adjusted.
2. Enter the set value of the exposure level with the 10-key, and 2. Enter the set value of the exposure level with the 10-key.
press the [#/P] key.
3. Press the [START] key.
3. Press the [START] key. Copying is started and the set value is stored.
Copying is started and the set value is stored.
Normal display NOW PRINTING Normal display NOW PRINTING
DOOR OPEN DOOR OPEN
Error display JAM Error display JAM
PAPER EMPTY PAPER EMPTY
There is no tray selection operation.
There is no tray selection operation.
The optimum paper tray for the scanned size is selected.
The optimum paper tray for the scanned size is selected.
Setting
Setting Item Content Default
Item Content Default range
range
1 COPY START Copy start – –
1 COPY START Copy start – –
2 EXP.LEVEL Exposure level selection
2 EXP.LEVEL Exposure level selection
3 AE (PHOTO ON) Ultra Fine AE (Half tone)
3 AE (PHOTO ON) Fine text AE (Half tone)
4 AE (PHOTO OFF) Ultra Fine AE
4 AE (PHOTO OFF) Fine text AE
MANUAL Ultra Fine MANUAL 0-99 50
MANUAL Fine text MANUAL 0-99 50 5
5 (PHOTO ON) (Half tone)
(PHOTO ON) (Half tone)
MANUAL
MANUAL 6 Ultra Fine MANUAL
6 Fine text MANUAL (PHOTO OFF)
(PHOTO OFF)
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed. Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

46-15 46-18
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Adjustment
Function FAX exposure level adjustment Function
(Purpose) (Super Fine mode individual adjustment) Used to adjust inclination for each exposure mode.
(Purpose)
Section FAX Item Picture quality
Item Image quality
Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure 1. Touch the item to be adjusted.
The currently set value is highlighted beside the item. The adjustment item and the current set value are highlighted.
1. Select an item to be adjusted. 2. Press the [START] key.
2. Enter the set value of the exposure level with the 10-key. The display is shifted to the copy menu.
3. Press the [START] key. 3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density.
Copying is started and the set value is stored. Set the exposure level with the 10-key.
Normal display NOW PRINTING 4. Press the [START] key.
DOOR OPEN Copying is started.
Error display JAM (Auto adjustment)
PAPER EMPTY Setting
Item Content Default
range
There is no tray selection operation. 1 AE AE
The optimum paper tray for the scanned size is selected. 2 TEXT Character Level 3.0
Setting 3 TEXT/PHOTO Character/Photo Level 3.0
Item Content Default 4 PHOTO Photo Level 3.0
range 1-99 50
1 COPY START Copy start – – 5 AE(TS) AE(TS)
2 EXP.LEVEL Exposure level selection 6 TEXT(TS) Character (TS) Level 3.0
Character/Photo
Super Fine AE 7 TEXT/PHOTO(TS) Level 3.0
3 AE (PHOTO ON) (TS)
(Half tone)
4 AE (PHOTO OFF) Super Fine AE Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display returns to the initial
0-99 50
MANUAL Super Fine MANUAL menu but the machine is not reset.
5
(PHOTO ON) (Half tone)
MANUAL
6 Super Fine MANUAL
(PHOTO OFF)
Note:Executable only when the FAX is installed.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 28
46-19 46-31
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Setting
Function Function Used to set the AE and the limit value in AE
Used to set the control method of the exposure mode.
(Purpose) (Purpose) (Toner save).
Item Picture quality Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure 1. Touch the item to be adjusted.
1. Touch the item to be adjusted. The adjustment item and the currently set value are highlighted.
The currently set value is highlighted beside the adjustment item. 2. Enter the set value with the 10-key.
2. Press the [START] key. Item Setting range Default
The display is shifted to the adjustment value entry menu. 1 AE
3. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key, and press the [START] key. 2 TEXT
0-2 1
When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the display returns to 3 TEXT/PHOTO
the original state (adjustment item selection menu). 4 PHOTO
Item Content Default
AE MODE Auto exposure mode*
1 (1:EXPOSURE (1: Priority on Image quality, 2 46-39
2:TONER) 2: Priority on toner consumption)
AE STOP(COPY) Auto exposure STOP mode Purpose Setting
2 (0:FIXED (COPY) 0 Function
Used to switch the FAX send image quality.
1:REAL TIME) (0: Fixed, 1: Real-time) (Purpose)
AE MODE(FAX) Enter the set value with the 10-key.
Auto exposure STOP mode (FAX)
3 (0:FIXED 0
(0: Fixed, 1: Real-time) Item Content Setting range Default
1:REAL TIME)
Original with pencil lines
AE STOP(SCAN) Auto exposure STOP mode 0 HAIRLINE
and thin lines 0-1 0
4 (0:FIXED (SCANNER) 0
1:REAL TIME) (0: Fixed, 1: Real-time) 1 PRINTER Printed original
Photo mode
5 PHOTO MODE 2
(1: ED (Error diffusion) , 2: DT (Dither))
* Auto exposure mode
• When SIM 26-6 (Destination setup) is changed from EX Japan to
48
Japan, the setup value becomes 1 (Default: Japan). If, on the con-
trary, it is changed from Japan to EX Japan, the set value becomes 48-1
2 (Default: EX Japan)
Purpose Adjustment
• If the auto exposure mode setup value is changed, the setup value
Function Used to adjust the copy mode magnification ratio
of SIM 46-30 (AE limit setup) is reset to the default value.
(Purpose) (main scanning direction, sub scanning direction).
Section Image processing
46-20
Item Picture quality
Purpose Adjustment Operation/procedure
Function Used to set the exposure correction value of SPF/
1. Touch the item to be set.
(Purpose) RSPF for OC exposure.
The item and the currently set value are highlighted.
Item Picture quality
2. Press the [START] key.
Operation/procedure The display is shifted to the copy menu.
1. Touch the item to be adjusted. 3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density, and enter the
The adjustment item and the currently set value are highlighted. adjustment value with the 10-key.
2. Enter the set value with the 10-key. 4. Press the [START] key.
Item Content Setting range Default Copying is started.
1 SPF EXPOSURE SPF Setting
1-99 53 Item Content Default
2 RSPF EXPOSURE RSPF range
Main scanning magnification
1 F-R 50
ratio adjustment
46-30 Sub scanning magnification
2 SCAN 60
Purpose Setting ratio adjustment
Function Used to set the AE and the limit value in AE RSPF surface sub scan
3 SPF (SIDE1)
(Purpose) (Toner save). magnification ratio 1-99
RSPF back surface sub scan
Operation/procedure 4 SPF (SIDE2)
magnification ratio 50
1. Touch the item to be adjusted.
DUPLEX sub scanning
The adjustment item and the currently set value are highlighted. 5 DUPLEX
magnification ratio adjustment
2. Enter the set value with the 10-key. 6 MirSpeed Mirror speed adjustment
If SIM 26-6 (Destination setup) and SIM46-19 (Auto exposure mode)
are changed, this setup is also changed to the default value accord- Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display is shifted to the ini-
ingly. tial menu, but the machine is not reset.

Item Setting range Default


1 AE
0-31 0
2 AE(TS)

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 29
48-2 There is no operation of tray selection.
The optimum paper tray for the scanned size is selected.
Purpose Adjustment
Even when the SPF/RSPF is selected, if there is no original on the
Function Used to adjust the scanner mode magnification ratio
SPF/RSPF, the OC is scanned.
(Purpose) (main/sub scanning direction).
Section Image processing Even when the OC is selected, if there is any original on the SPF/
RSPF, the SPF/RSPF is scanned. (Setting 2)
Item Picture quality
Setting
Operation/procedure Item Content Default
range
1. Touch the item to be set. 1 COPY START Copy start – –
The item and the currently set value are highlighted. SCAN SELECT Scan selection
2 1-255* 128
(OC/SPF/RSPF) (OC/ SPF/RSPF)
2. Press the [START] key. SCAN Main scanning
The display is shifted to the copy menu. 3 OC(MAIN) magnification ratio 1-255* 128
3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density, and enter the adjustment (OC)
adjustment value with the 10-key. SCAN Sub scanning
4. Press the [START] key. 4 OC(SUB) magnification ratio 1-255* 128
Copying is started. adjustment (OC)
SCAN Main scanning
Setting
Item Content Default 5 SPF(MAIN) magnification ratio 1-255* 128
range
adjustment (SPF)
Main scanning magnification SCAN Sub scanning
1 F-R
ratio adjustment 6 SPF(SUB) magnification ratio 1-255* 128
Sub scanning magnification adjustment (SPF)
2 SCAN
ratio adjustment SCAN Main scanning
1-99 50
RSPF surface sub scan 7 RSPF(MAIN) magnification ratio 1-255* 128
3 SPF (SIDE1)
magnification ratio adjustment (RSPF)
RSPF back surface sub scan SCAN Sub scanning
4 SPF (SIDE2) 8 RSPF(SUB) magnification ratio 1-255* 128
magnification ratio
adjustment (RSPF)
* The adjustment can be made in the range of –12.7% - +12.7% by
48-3 the increment of 0.1%.
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.
Purpose Adjustment
Function Used to adjust the print mode magnification ratio
(Purpose) correction. 48-9
Section Image processing Purpose Adjustment
Item Picture quality Function (Purpose) FAX magnification adjustment (print)
Operation/procedure Section FAX
1. The adjustment item and the currently set value are highlighted. Operation/procedure
2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key. The currently set value is highlighted beside the item.
Changes magnification ratio by changing speed of main motor. 1. Select an item to be adjusted.
The change of the paper transfer speed is 0.1% when changing value 2. Enter the set value of the magnification ratio correction with the 10
is 1. key.
Setting 3. Press the [START] key.
Item Content Default
range Normal display NOW PRINTING
1 145mm/s Main motor speed (145mm/s)
45-55 50 DOOR OPEN
2 122mm/s Main motor speed (122mm/s)
Error display JAM
PAPER EMPTY

48-8 There is no operation of tray selection.


The optimum paper tray for the scanned size is selected.
Purpose Adjustment
Function When two pages are scanned, duplex printing is made.
FAX magnification adjustment (read) Setting
(Purpose) Item Content Default
Section FAX range
1 COPY START Copy start 1-255 128
Operation/procedure Print magnification ratio
The currently set value is highlighted beside the item. 2 Horizontal adjustment (Horizontal, vertical 1-255 128
1. Select an item to be adjusted. to paper passing)
Print magnification ratio
2. Enter the set value of the magnification ratio adjustment with the
3 Vertical adjustment (Vertical, parallel to 1-255 128
10 key.
paper passing)
3. Press the [START] key. Print magnification ratio
Copying is started and the set value is stored. Horizontal adjustment on the back surface
4 1-255 128
Normal display NOW PRINTING (DUPLEX) (Horizontal, vertical to paper
DOOR OPEN passing)
Error display JAM Print magnification ratio
PAPER EMPTY Vertical adjustment on the back surface
5 1-255 128
(DUPLEX) (Vertical, parallel to paper
passing)
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 30
Setting
50 Item Content
range
Default
Left edge void adjustment
8 SIDE VOID 1-99 18
50-1 (First print surface)
Left edge void adjustment
Purpose Adjustment 9 SIDE VOID-DUP 1-99 18
(Duplex)
Function
Used to adjust the copy lead edge position. Image loss amount
(Purpose)
10 LOSS(OC) adjustment (Lead edge 1-5 3
Item Picture quality Image position
image loss set value) (OC)
Operation/procedure
1. Touch the item to be adjusted.
The item and the currently set value are highlighted. 50-5
2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the [P] key., Purpose Adjustment
The display goes to the copy menu. Function Used to adjust the print image position (top margin) on
When the [START] key is pressed, the display goes to the copying (Purpose) the print paper in the print mode.
state and print is started.
Item Picture quality Print area
(When the [P] key is pressed: Copy menu)
Operation/procedure
3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density.
1. Touch the item to be adjusted.
Enter the exposure level with the 10-key.
The item and the currently set value are highlighted.
4. Press the [START] key.
Copying is started. 2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the [P] key.,
The display goes to the copy menu.
Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display is shifted to the ini-
When the [START] key is pressed, the display goes to the copying
tial menu, but the machine is not reset.
state and print is started.
(Adjustment procedure)
(When the [P] key is pressed: Copy menu)
1. Note down the adjustment value of SIM 50-5 (Items 1, 2, 3, 4), and
3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density.
change the value to 99.
Enter the exposure level with the 10-key.
2. Set SIM 50-1 (Items 2, 3, 4, 5) to 1. (By setting to 1, there is no void.)
4. Press the [START] key.
3. Place a chart with a clear lead edge (or a ruler) on the OC docu- Copying is started.
ment table.
Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display is shifted to the ini-
4. Use SIM 50-1 (Item 1) to execute test print. Check the print out and tial menu, but the machine is not reset.
adjust so that the lead edge image is printed. (1 - 99: About Item Content Setting range Default
0.127mm/Step) 1 TRAY1 1st tray 0-99
5. Reset the adjustment values of SIM 50-5 (Items 1, 2, 3, 4) to the 2 OPTION Option tray
53
original values, and execute test print. Check the print out and 3 MANUAL Manual feed 1-99
adjust so that the lead edge image is printed on the lead edge of 4 DUPLEX Back print
paper. (1 - 99: About 0.127mm/Step).
6. Adjust SIM 50-1 (Items 2, 3, 4, 5) so that the lead edge void on the
print out is the specified value. (1 - 99: About 0.127mm/Step) 50-6
7. Similar to procedure 6, adjust SIM 50-1 (Item 6, 7) so that the rear Purpose Adjustment
edge void is the specified value. (1 - 99: About 0.127mm/Step) Function Used to adjust the print image position (top margin) on
8. Similar to procedure 6, adjust SIM 50-1 (Item 8, 9) so that the left (Purpose) print paper in the copy mode. (RSPF)
edge void is the specified value. (1 - 99: About 0.127mm/Step) Item Picture quality Image position
9. Make an enlargement copy (400%), and check that there is no Operation/procedure
shade of the cabinet printed at the lead edge. 1. Touch the item to be adjusted.
10. If there is a shade printed at the lead edge in procedure 9, adjust The item and the currently set value are highlighted.
SIM 50-1 (Item 10). (1 - 5: About 0.677mm) 2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the [P] key.,
* If there is no problem, set to 2. The display goes to the copy menu.
When the [START] key is pressed, the display goes to the copying
Setting state and print is started.
Item Content Default
range (When the [P] key is pressed: Copy menu)
Original scan start position 3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density.
adjustment Enter the exposure level with the 10-key.
1 RRC-A 1-99 43
Lead edge position
4. Press the [START] key.
adjustment value (OC)
Copying is started.
Lead edge cancel
2 DEN-A 1-99 18 Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display is shifted to the ini-
adjustment (Main tray)
tial menu, but the machine is not reset.
Lead edge cancel
3 DEN-A-MANUAL adjustment (Manual feed 1-99 18 Setting
tray) Item Content Default
range
Lead edge cancel Surface original scan start
4 DEN-A -OPTION 1-99 18 1 SIDE1 1-99 50
adjustment (Option tray) position adjustment
Lead edge cancel Back original scan start
2 SIDE2 1-99 50
5 DEN-A -DUPLEX adjustment (back of the 1-99 18 position set
machine) Rear edge void adjustment
3 END EDGE 1-99 50
6 DEN-B Rear edge void adjustment 1-99 30 (RSPF)
Rear edge void adjustment Surface image loss quantity
7 DEN-B-DUP 1-99 50 4 LOSS(SIDE1) 1-5 3
(Duplex) set
5 LOSS(SIDE2) Back image loss quantity set 1-5 3

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 31
Setting 3. Press the [START] key.
Item Content Default
range Normal display NOW PRINTING
Surface rear edge image DOOR OPEN
6 REARLOS(SIDE1) 1-5 3
loss quantity set Error display JAM
Back rear edge image loss PAPER EMPTY
7 REARLOS(SIDE2) 1-5 3
quantity set
There is no tray selection operation.
The optimum paper tray for the scanned size is selected.
50-8 When two pages are scanned, duplex print is made,
The adjustments on the machine side must have been normally Setting
Item Content Default
completed. range
Purpose Adjustment 1 COPY START Copy start – –
Function (Purpose) FAX lead edge adjustment (read) Print lead edge void
Section FAX 2 LEAD adjustment value 43-57 53
The currently set value is highlighted beside the item. (Front surface)
Print left edge void
1. Select an item to be adjusted.
3 LEFT adjustment value 43-57 53
2. Enter the set value of the lead edge adjustment with the 10 key. (Front surface)
3. Press the [START] key. Print rear edge void
Copying is started. 4 REAR adjustment value 43-57 53
Normal display NOW PRINTING (Front surface)
DOOR OPEN Print lead edge void
LEAD
Error display JAM 5 adjustment value 43-57 53
(DUPLEX)
PAPER EMPTY (Back surface)
Print left edge void
There is no tray selection operation.
6 LEFT (DUPLEX) adjustment value 43-57 53
The optimum paper tray for the scanned size is selected.
(Back surface)
4. Select the scanning method. Print rear edge void
Even when the SPF/RSPF is selected, if there is no original on the REAR
7 adjustment value 43-57 53
SPF/RSPF, the OC is scanned. (DUPLEX)
(Back surface)
Even when the OC is selected, if there is any original on the SPF/
RSPF, the SPF/RSPF is scanned. (Setting 2) Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.
Setting
Item Content Default
range 50-10
1 COPY START Copy start – –
SCAN Purpose Adjustment
Scan selection (1: OC,
2 SELECT (OC/ 1-3 1 Used to adjust the print image center position.
2: SPF, 3: RSPF back) Function
SPF/RSPF) (Adjustment can be made for each paper feed
(Purpose)
Scan lead edge position section.)
3 LEAD adjustment value of the 43-57 50 Section Image processing (ICU)
selected method in 2. Item Picture quality Image position
Scan left edge position
Operation/procedure
4 LEFT adjustment value of the 43-57 50
selected method in 2. 1. Touch the item to be adjusted.
Scan rear edge position The item and the currently set value are highlighted.
5 REAR adjustment value of the 43-57 50 2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the [P] key.,
selected method in 2. The display goes to the copy menu.
Scan right edge position When the [START] key is pressed, the display goes to the copying
6 RIGHT adjustment value of the 43-57 50 state and print is started.
selected method in 2. (When the [P] key is pressed: Copy menu)
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed. 3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density.
Enter the exposure level with the 10-key.
50-9 4. Press the [START] key.
Copying is started.
Purpose Adjustment
Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display is shifted to the ini-
Function (Purpose) FAX lead edge adjustment (print) tial menu, but the machine is not reset.
Section FAX
Item Content Setting range Default
Operation/procedure 1 BYPASS Manual paper feed
The currently set value is highlighted beside the item. 2 TRAY1 1st tray
1. Select an item to be adjusted. 3 TRAY2 2nd tray
1-99 50
2. Enter the set value of the lead edge adjustment with the 10 key. 4 TRAY3 3rd tray
5 TRAY4 4th tray
6 DUPLEX Back print

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 32
50-12 4. Press the [START] key.
Copying is started.
Purpose Adjustment Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display is shifted to the ini-
Function Used to adjust the print image center position. tial menu, but the machine is not reset.
(Purpose) (Adjustment can be made for each document mode.)
Item Content Setting range Default
Section Image processing
1 BYPASS Manual feed 1-99 50
Item Picture quality Image position
2 TRAY1 1st tray 1-99 50
Operation/procedure 3 TRAY2 2nd tray 1-99 50
1. Touch the item to be adjusted. 4 TRAY3 3rd tray 1-99 50
The item and the currently set value are highlighted. 5 TRAY4 4th tray 1-99 50
2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the [P] key., 6 DUPLEX Back print 1-99 70
The display goes to the copy menu. 7 SPF(SIDE1) RSPF front surface 1-99 50
When the [START] key is pressed, the display goes to the copying
8 SPF(SIDE2) RSPF back surface 1-99 50
state and print is started.
(When the [P] key is pressed: Copy menu)
3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density. 51-8
Enter the exposure level with the 10-key.
Purpose Setting
4. Press the [START] key.
Function Used to set the OPC drum separation pawl operation
Copying is started.
(Purpose) inhibit. (ON/OFF)
Note: When this simulation is canceled, the display is shifted to the ini-
Image process
tial menu, but the machine is not reset. Section
(Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Item Content Setting range Default Item Operation
1 OC OC document scan
Operation/procedure
RSPF document front
2 SPF(SIDE1) Select the set value with the 10-key.
surface scan 1-99 50
RSPF document back Item Content Setting range Default
3 SPF(SIDE2)
surface scan 0 ON Enable
0-1 0
1 OFF Disable

51-9
51
Purpose Setting
Function Used to adjust the OPC drum separation voltage ON/
51-1
(Purpose) OFF timing.
Purpose Adjustment Section Process (OPC drum, developing, transfer, cleaning)
Function Item Operation
Used to adjust the OPC drum separation pawl ON time.
(Purpose)
Operation/Procedure
Image process
Section 1. Touch the item to be adjusted.
(Photoconductor/Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Item Operation The item and the currently set value are highlighted.
2. Enter the set value with the 10-key.
Operation/procedure
Setting
1. Touch the item to be adjusted. Item Content Default
range
The item and the currently set value are highlighted.
Separation voltage ON timing
2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.
* Transfer V2ON reference
Item Setting range Default 1 SHV ON 25-90 50
(Synchronized with the
1 145mm/s adjustment value of 50.)
1-99 50
2 122mm/s Separation voltage OFF timing
* Transfer V2OFF reference
2 SHV OFF 50-90 75
(Synchronized with the
51-2 adjustment value of 50.)
Purpose Adjustment
Used to adjust the contact pressure of paper onto the
resist roller in each section (copier paper feed section,
Function duplex paper feed section, RSPF paper feed section).
(Purpose) (When the print image position varies greatly for the
paper or when a lot of paper jam troubles occur, the
adjustment is required.)
Section Paper transport (Discharge/Switchback/Transport)
Item Operation
Operation/procedure
1. Touch the item to be adjusted.
The item and the currently set value are highlighted.
2. Press the [START] key.
The display is shifted to the copy menu.
3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density.
Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 33
53-9
53
Purpose Adjustment
Function
53-6 RSPF read position adjustment
(Purpose)
Purpose Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
Used to adjust the detection level of the RSPF width.
Press [START] key.
The adjustment method is the 4-point system. Set the
Function Item Setting range Default
guide to Max. (A3/WLetter) position, A4R/Letter R
(Purpose) Read position adjustment 1-99 50
position, A5R/Invoice R position, and Min. position for
adjustment.
Section RSPF
Operation/Procedure 53-10
(Max. position setting) Purpose Adjustment
1. Set the guide to the maximum position, and press the [START] key. Function
RSPF exp adjustment
2. Set A4R and fit the guide, and press the [START] key. (Purpose)
3. Set A5R and fit the guide, and press the [START] key. Operation/Procedure
4. Set the guide to the minimum position, and press the [START] key. 1. Press [START] key.
5. Set the paper recognition width (+), and press the [START] key. 2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key.
6. Set the paper recognition width (–),and press the [START] key. Item Setting range Default
If “FAILED” is displayed in the above procedure 1, 2, 3, or 4, repeat the 1 SPF EXPOSURE
1-99 53
adjustment. 2 RSPF EXPOSURE
(Middle position L/S setting)
Middle position YES MID-L ADJ.ON
adjustment L NO MID-L ADJ.OFF
Middle position YES MID-S ADJ.ON 55
adjustment S NO MID-S ADJ.OFF
55-1
53-7
Purpose Setting
Purpose Adjustment
Function
Function Used to enter the RSPF width detection adjustment Used to set the soft switch.
(Purpose)
(Purpose) value.
Section Operation
Section RSPF
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1. Touch the item to be adjusted. Used to enter the number of SW to be changed.
The item and the currently set value are highlighted. The bit to be changed is specified by 10-key. (The current value is
2. Enter the RSPF original tray size adjustment value (specified on highlighted.)
the back of the RSPF) with the 10-key. When [START] key is pressed, the entered value is set.
Item Content Setting range Default
1 MAX POSITION Max. width
2 POSITION 1
3 POSITION 2
Adjustment point 1
Adjustment point 2
0-999 0 61
4 MIN POSITION Min. width
61-1
Purpose Operation test/check
53-8 Used to check the LSU (polygon motor) operation.
Function
Check speed can select 145mm/s or 122mm/s
Purpose Adjustment (Purpose)
individually.
Used to adjust the RSPF scan position of the mirror
Section LSU
unit automatically. For the RSPF scan position
Item Operation
automatic adjustment, the mirror unit is shifted to
Function
11mm before the RSPF glass cover edge, and is Operation/procedure
(Purpose)
operated automatically to scan images by the unit of 1 Press the [START] key, and the LSU test is performed.
step, detecting the position up to the glass cover Used to set the LSU to ON state and check that the sync signal
automatically. (HSYNC/) is outputted or not.
Operation/Procedure After operation for 30 sec, the result is displayed. (Interruption cannot
With the RSPF or the OC cover open, put a white paper on the OC be made for 5 sec after starting the operation.)
glass (the RSPF glass surface is included for the RSPF standard
model), and press the [START] key.
If the adjustment is executed normally, the adjustment value is dis-
played and saved in the EEPROM. If an error occurs, “ERR” is dis-
played and the value is not saved in the EEPROM.
If the adjustment is not performed because of abnormality, “---” is dis-
played.
During execution of the adjustment, the operation cannot be inter-
rupted.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 34
63 65
63-1 65-1
Adjustment/setting/operation data output/check Purpose Adjustment
Purpose
(display/print) Function Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section)
Function Used to check the result of shading correction. (Purpose) detection position.
(Purpose) (The shading correction data are displayed.)
Section Operation (Display, Operation)
Section Scanner (Exposure)
Item Operation Operation/Procedure
Press the keys displayed on the LCD sequentially.
Operation/procedure
Adjust the touch panel coordinates.
Pressing the [START] key performs shading, and displays the result
(center pixel). When the point of “+” on the LCD is pressed, it turns gray. Press all the
four points of “+.”
63-7
Purpose Adjustment 65-2
Used to adjust the RSPF white correction start pixel
Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output check
Function position automatically. Purpose
(Display, Print)
(Purpose) This adjustment is performed after the lens unit is
Function Used to check the touch panel (LCD display section)
replaced.
(Purpose) detection position adjustment result.
Section Scanner
Section Operation (Display, Operation)
Item Operation
Operation/Procedure
Operation/procedure
Check the touch panel coordinates.
Lift the RSPF unit to the fully open position, and press the [START] key.
[ ] indicates the order number of the pixel of the white sheet for RSPF Press the keys displayed on the LCD sequentially.
exposure correction in the RSPF position. When the touch panel is pressed, the X-coordinate and the Y-coordi-
If the adjustment is normally completed, “COMPLETE” is displayed nate (dot conversion values) are displayed.
and data are written into the EEPROM.
In case of an abnormality, “ERROR” is displayed and no data is written
into the EEPROM. 65-5
The RSPF white correction start pixel = Displayed pixel position – 34 Adjustment/Setting/Operation data output check
If the simulation is executed with the RSPF unit closed, an error will Purpose
(Display, Print)
result.
Function
Used to check the key inputs of the operation panel.
(Purpose)
Section Operation (screen/operation)
64 Operation/procedure
Check the key input of the operation panel.
64-1 Press the keys displayed on the LCD sequentially.
Purpose Operation test/check After completion of all key entries, “COMPLETE” is displayed.
Function Used to check the operation of the printer function
(Purpose) (auto print operation).
Section Printer 66
Item Operation
Operation/procedure 66-1
1. Select the print item with the 10-key. Purpose Setting
2. Press the [START] key. Function
The display is shifted to the copy menu. Used to change and check the FAX-related soft SW.
(Purpose)
3. Select the paper feed tray and the print density. Section FAX
4. Press the [START] key.
Operation/procedure
Copying is started.
1. Enter the soft SW number to be selected with the 10-key.
During execution of the print test, the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key and
the [INTERRUPTION] key are invalid. 2. Check and change the setting content of the selected soft SW.
Setting 3. Press the [START] key to save the set content.
Item Content Default The FAX-related soft SW is displayed on the LCD, and changing can
range
Self print is made in 2 by 4 mode be made by monitoring it.
(printing 2 lines and not printing Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.
4 lines). Since scanning is not
2 BY 4
1 performed, when the original is
MODE
set on the RSPF, this cannot be
performed. 1-2 1
* Duplex print cannot be made.
Lattice print (1cm, 1dot width
LATTICE WLT, A3 print (A3 main scan,
2
PRINT WLT sub scan)) is performed.
* Duplex print can be made.
* If the IMC board is not installed, the key inputs cannot be made.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 35
66-2 2. Detailed procedure
“55H” is written to all the addresses of each memory, and the
Purpose Adjustment
1 address data are read in sequence to check that they were
Function Used to clear the FAX-related soft SW.
properly written.
(Purpose) (Except for the FAX adjustment values)
“AAH” is written to all the addresses of each memory, and the
Section FAX
2 address data are read in sequence to check that they were
Operation/procedure properly written.
1. Enter the country code with the 10-key, and press the [START] “00H” is written to all the addresses of each memory, and the
key. 3 address data are read in sequence to check that they were
2. When “1: (YES)” is selected, the soft SW corresponding to the properly written.
country code is cleared. When “2: (NO)” is selected, the simulation Perform checks 1 - 3 sequentially. If there is no abnormality, it is
is canceled. 4 “OK.” If there is any abnormality, “NG” is notified to the error
Country code address.
The check result is saved. New result is overwrited with each
Japan : 00000000 5
check.
U.S.A. : 10110101
Australia : 00001001 Interruption cannot be made during operation.

U.K. : 10110100 Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

France : 00111101
Germany : 00000100 66-4
Sweden : 10100101
Purpose Operation test/check
New Zealand : 01111110 Function
Signal send mode (Signal send level: Max.)
China : 00100110 (Purpose)
Singapore : 10011100 Section FAX
Taiwan : 11111110 Item Operation
India : 01010011 Operation/procedure
Malaysia : 01101100 Select the signal number with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
Hong Kong : 01010000 The signal is sent to the line and the machine speaker. (Sending the
Middle east : 11111101 signal is continued until the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed.)
SouthAfrica : 10011111 By entering the signal number and pressing the [START] key during
execution, the signal kind can be changed.
Spain : 10100000
Item Send signal
Portugal : 10001011
1 NO SIGNAL Signal not sent
Russia : 10111000
2 33.6 V34 33.6 V34
Denmark : 00110001
3 31.2 V34 31.2 V34
Norway : 10000010
4 28.8 V34 28.8 V34
Switzerland : 10100110 5 26.4 V34 26.4 V34
Italy : 01011001 6 24.0 V34 24.0 V34
Belgium : 00001111 7 21.6 V34 21.6 V34
Luxembourg : 01101001 8 19.2 V34 19.2 V34
Netherlands : 01111011 9 16.8 V34 16.8 V34
Finland : 00111100 10 14.4 V34 14.4 V34
11 12.0 V34 12.0 V34
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed. 12 9.6 V34 9.6 V34
13 7.2 V34 7.2 V34
66-3 14 4.8 V34 4.8 V34
15 2.4 V34 2.4 V34
Purpose Operation test/check
16 14.4 V33 14.4 V33
Function (Purpose) FAX PWB memory check 17 12.0 V33 12.0 V33
Section FAX 18 14.4 V17 14.4 V17
Item Operation
19 12.0 V17 12.0 V17
Operation/procedure 20 9.6 V17 9.6 V17
Press the [START] key. 21 7.2 V17 7.2 V17
Read/write can be checked for FAX PWB memory. 22 9.6 V29 9.6 V29
The check result is displayed separately for each memory. 23 7.2 V29 7.2 V29
1. Memory to be checked 24 4.8 V27t 4.8 V27t
25 2.4 V27t 2.4 V27t
DRAM
26 0.3 FLG 7EH Flag signal
SRAM
27 CED2100
Program area SUM check only
Flash ROM 28 CNG1100
Memory area Tone signal
29 0.3 V21
The memory size follows the 30 ANSam
Option memory
automatically detected value. Pseudo-ringer sound
31 RINGER
PAGE ([ON HOOK] key ON)
MODEM

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 36
Item Send signal Signal number Send signal
Voice message (no sound) Voice message (no sound)
Under the state where the ring back tone can be Under the state where the ring back tone can be
32 No MSG 32 No MSG
sent to the line, keep the sound composition IC sent to the line, keep the sound composition IC
volume to 0. volume to 0.
Ring back tone (no sound) Ring back tone (no sound)
33 No RBT Under the state where the ring back tone can be 33 No RBT Under the state where the ring back tone can be
sent to the line, keep the G/A volume to 0. sent to the line, keep the G/A volume to 0.
Dial pulse (make) Dial pulse (make)
34 DP MAKE Maintain the make state with keeping the condition 34 DP MAKE Maintain the make state with keeping the condition
to be able to send to the dial pulse line. to be able to send to the dial pulse line.
Dial pulse (break) Dial pulse (break)
35 DP BRK Maintain the break state with keeping the condition 35 DP BRK Maintain the break state with keeping the condition
to be able to send to the dial pulse line. to be able to send to the dial pulse line.
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed. Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

66-5
66-6
Purpose Operation test/check
Purpose Data output, check
Function
Signal send mode (Signal send level soft SW setting) Function (Purpose) Printing the confidential password
(Purpose)
Section FAX
Section FAX
Item Data Confidential/Pass code
Item Operation
Operation/procedure Operation/procedure
Select the signal number with the 10-key, and press the [START] key. Press the [START] key.
By setting the signal number, signals are sent to the line and the The confidential ID table (confidential BOX numbers, confidential BOX
machine speaker. (Sending signals is continued until interruption com- names, and confidential password) is printed.
mand is made (by pressing [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.) The confidential data of My company mode is printed separately.
By entering the signal number and pressing the [START] key during Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.
execution, the signal kind can be changed.
Signal number Send signal 66-7
1 NO SIGNAL Signal not sent
Purpose Data output, check
2 33.6 V34 33.6 V34
3 31.2 V34 31.2 V34 Function (Purpose) Print the screen memory contents
4 28.8 V34 28.8 V34 Section FAX
Item Data Image data
5 26.4 V34 26.4 V34
6 24.0 V34 24.0 V34 Operation/procedure
7 21.6 V34 21.6 V34 Press the [START] key.
8 19.2 V34 19.2 V34
Used to input all image data (including confidential reception data,
9 16.8 V34 16.8 V34 remote send image, not-sent image) stored in image memory of the
10 14.4 V34 14.4 V34 FAX section.
11 12.0 V34 12.0 V34
The output image is remained even after outputting.
12 9.6 V34 9.6 V34
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.
13 7.2 V34 7.2 V34
14 4.8 V34 4.8 V34
15 2.4 V34 2.4 V34 66-10
16 14.4 V33 14.4 V33 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Check
17 12.0 V33 12.0 V33 Function (Purpose) Image data memory clear
18 14.4 V17 14.4 V17 Section FAX
19 12.0 V17 12.0 V17 Item Data Image data
20 9.6 V17 9.6 V17 Operation/procedure
21 7.2 V17 7.2 V17 Select “1: YES” with the 10-key and press the [START] key. (When “2:
22 9.6 V29 9.6 V29 NO” is selected, the simulation is canceled.)
23 7.2 V29 7.2 V29 Used to clear all image data (including confidential reception data)
24 4.8 V27t 4.8 V27t stored in image memory of the FAX section.
25 2.4 V27t 2.4 V27t The management table is also cleared (initialized) at the same time.
26 0.3 FLG 7EH Flag signal * lIf there is any print data, the power must be turned off after clearing.
27 CED2100
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.
28 CNG1100
Tone signal
29 0.3 V21
30 ANSam
Pseudo-ringer sound
31 RINGER
([ON HOOK] key ON)

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 37
66-11 66-14
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Operation check/test
Function Used to send 300bps signals. Function
(Purpose) (Signal send level: Max.) Used to perform the dial test. (10 PPS send test)
(Purpose)
Section FAX Section FAX
Item Operation Item Operation
Operation/procedure Operation/Procedure
Select the signal number with the 10-key, and press the [START] key. 1. Select the item with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
By setting the signal number, the specified signal is delivered to the 2. Set the make time with the 10-key.
line at the speed of 300bps. (The signal is continuously sent until the
The dial is sent with the set value + 26ms.
interruption command is provided by pressing the [SYSTEM SET-
TINGS] key.) The sending dial cannot be interrupted.
The signal send level can be selected from 0dB or the soft SW set value. Item Content Setting range
The signal send level is returned to the soft SW set value before exe- 0 EXECUTE Execution –
cution of the mode after completion of the mode. 1 MAKE TIME Dial pulse make time setting 0-15
By entering the number and pressing the [START] key during execu- Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.
tion, the signal kind can be changed.
Item 66-15
1 NO SIGNAL
2 11111 Purpose Operation check/test
3 11110 Function
Used to perform the dial test. (20 PPS send test)
4 00000 (Purpose)
5 010101 Section FAX
6 00001 Item Operation
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed. Operation/Procedure
1. Select the item with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
66-12
2. Set the make time with the 10-key.
Purpose Operation test/check The dial is sent with the set value + 9ms.
Function Used to send 300bps signals. The sending dial cannot be interrupted.
(Purpose) (Signal send level: Set by soft SW)
Section FAX Item Content Setting range
Item Operation 0 EXECUTE Execution –
1 MAKE TIME Dial pulse make time setting 0-15
Operation/procedure
Select the signal number with the 10-key, and press the [START] key. Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.
By setting the signal number, the specified signal is delivered to the
line at the speed of 300bps. (The signal is continuously sent until the 66-16
interruption command is provided by pressing the [SYSTEM SET-
TINGS] key.) Purpose Operation check/test
The signal send level can be selected from 0dB or the soft SW set value. Function
Used to perform the dial test. (DTFM signal send test)
(Purpose)
The signal send level is returned to the soft SW set value before exe-
Section FAX
cution of the mode after completion of the mode.
Item Operation
By entering the number and pressing the [START] key during execu-
tion, the signal kind can be changed. Operation/Procedure
Item 1. Select the item with the 10-key, and press the [START] key.
1 NO SIGNAL 2. Enter the set value with the 10-key.
2 11111
The sending dial cannot be interrupted.
3 11110
4 00000
Setting
5 010101 Item Content
range
6 00001
0 EXECUTE Execution –
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed. 1 HIGH (SW) High group 0-15
2 HIGH-LOW (SW) High group, Low group 0-15
66-13
3. Select the soft SW reflection.
Purpose Setting Item Content
Function (Purpose) Used to register the dial numbers. 1 NO STORE TO SW Not reflected.
Section FAX 2 STORE TO SW Reflected. (Shift SW value changed.)
Item Operation
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.
Operation/procedure
Enter the number with the 10-key, [*] key, and [#] key.
Press the [CLEAR] key to return to the initial state.
Press the [START] key to register the entered number.
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 38
66-17 66-21
Purpose Operation check/test Purpose Check
Function Used to check the DTFM signal send operation. Function (Purpose) FAX information print
(Purpose) (Signal send level: Max.) Section FAX
Section FAX Item Data
Item Operation Operation/procedure
Operation/procedure 1. Select the item to be printed.
Enter the DTFM signal (1 digit (1 to 9, 0, *, #)) and press the [START] key. 2. Press the [START] key.
When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during execution, the The information of the selected item is printed.
simulation is terminated.
Item Content
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed. 1 USER SW.LIST User setting list
2 SOFT SW.LIST Soft SW list
66-18 System error list
Purpose Operation check/test 3 SYSTEM ERROR Used to print the system error log (error
Function Used to check the DTFM signal send operation. number and time).
(Purpose) (Signal send level: Set by soft SW.) Protocol error list
Section FAX Regardless of soft SW38-1 status, the
protocol monitor of the preceding
Item Operation
communication is printed. (Printing is
4 PROTOCOL
Operation/Procedure allowed at any time before starting the
Enter the DTFM signal (1 digit (1 to 9, 0, *, #)) and press the [START] key. next communication.) For this operation,
When the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during execution, the the protocol monitor of one
simulation is terminated. communication is always buffered.
PARTIAL SRAM
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed. 5 Clear the FSS area in the SRAM.
CLEAR

66-19 Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

Purpose Back up
Function 66-22
Used to write the SRAM data to the Flash ROM.
(Purpose)
Section FAX Purpose Setting
Item Data Function
Handset sound volume adjustment (Japan only)
(Purpose)
Operation/Procedure Section FAX
Select “1: YES” with the 10-key, and press the [START] key. The data Item Operation
are backed up. (When “2: NO” is selected, the simulation is canceled.)
Operation/procedure
* The AR-FX5 data cannot be written into the AR-FX7. If it is exe-
cuted, data are initialized and deleted. In addition, the AR-FX7 data 1. Select the sound volume to be set.
cannot be used in the AR-FX5. (MAX: Large, MIDDLE: Medium, MIN: Small)

Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed. 2. Press [START] key.
Selection of 1, 2, and 3 can be made even during execution of the sim-
ulation.
66-20
A sound is generated during execution of the simulation.
Purpose Back up
Note: Execution is possible only when FAX is installed.
Function
Used to write the Flash ROM data to the SRAM.
(Purpose)
Section FAX 66-24
Item Data
Purpose Data clear
Operation/Procedure Function
Used to clear the FAST storage data. (SEC only)
Select “1: YES” with the 10-key, and press the [START] key. The Flash (Purpose)
ROM data are read out and written into the SRAM. (When “2: NO” is Section FAX
selected, the simulation is canceled.) Item Data Initializing
* The AR-FX5 data cannot be written into the AR-FX7. If it is exe- Operation/procedure
cuted, data are initialized and deleted. In addition, the AR-FX7 data
Select “1: YES” with the 10-key and press the [START] key. The FAST
cannot be used in the AR-FX5.
storage data are cleared. (When “2: NO” is selected, the simulation is
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed. canceled.)
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 39
66-30 66-34
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to set the TEL/LIU. Function (Purpose) Communication time measurement display
Section FAX Section FAX
Item Operation Item Operation
Operation/procedure Operation/procedure
When the relay state of the polarity reverse relay, the handset hook The send/receive test is performed, and the time required for send/
switch, or the external telephone hook switch is changed, the content receive of the image data in the test is measured and displayed.
of change is displayed regardless of the soft SW setup (real time). The Communication
display of change is kept until an interruption command is supplied by : Memory send
means
pressing the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key. Setup on the user : Normal Character
Picture quality
side when executing : Lighter
Notification contents Density
Item communication : ON
Signal low Signal high ECM
: OFF
HS2 ON OFF Sender information
HS1 ON OFF From flag reception before sending of image
Send
Measuring data until sending of RCP frame
RHS ON OFF
range From flag reception before reception of
EXHS ON OFF Receive
image data until reception of RCP frame
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed. Used to make communication not in a
Mode when measuring simulation process but in the normal screen
66-31 and measure the time.
Enter the simulation for communication time
Purpose Setting How to check the time
check and check the time.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the TEL/LIU. Measuring unit msec
Section FAX
When there are two or more send/receive operations of image data in
Item Operation one communication, only the time of the last send/receive data near
Operation/Procedure the end is measured.
1. Enter the set value. (Valid only 1 to 5) Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.
2. The entered bit is alternatively switched between “0” and “1” and
the target signal name is highlighted. 66-37
3. Press the [START] key to send the signal. Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Check
When the [CUSTUM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the output is terminated. Function (Purpose) Speaker sound volume adjustment
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed. Section FAX
Operation/procedure
66-32 The following test sound is delivered to the line and the speaker to
adjust the sound kind and volume.
Purpose Operation test/check
The send level to the line is the set value of soft SW.
Function (Purpose) Receive data check
The set values of the selected sound kind and volume are written to
Section FAX
each soft SW.
Item Operation
1. Sound kinds pattern
Operation/procedure Sound kinds (Test sound) Sound volume set value
The fixed data received from the line are checked and the result is displayed. RINGER Call sound DEF. LAR. MED. SMA.
When data are coincident, “OK” is displayed. When not, “NG” is displayed. Line monitor sound (Test
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed. LINE MONITO sound: communication DEF. LAR. MED. SMA.
signal sound)
66-33 On-hook (Test sound,
Purpose Operation test/check ON HOOK communication signal DEF. LAR. MED. SMA.
sound)
Function (Purpose) Signal detection check
SCAN FINISH Scan finish sound DEF. LAR. MED. SMA.
Section FAX
Communication finish
Item Operation TX/RX FINISH DEF. LAR. MED. SMA.
sound
Operation/Procedure DTMF DTFM send sound DEF. LAR. MED. SMA.
Signal detection is checked and the result is displayed. LAR: (MED. Value + 1)
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed. MED: (SMA value +1) - (LAR value – 1)
SMA: 1 - (MED. Value + 1)
2. Sound volume pattern
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 40
66-41
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Check
Function
CI signal check
(Purpose)
Operation/procedure
When the [START] key is pressed, the call signal from CI pin is
detected to deliver the call sound to the line and the speaker. The vol-
ume of call sound follows the soft SW.
Signal detection and delivery of pseudo-call sound at detection are
executed until the interruption command is provided by pressing the
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
Note: Executable only when the FAX is installed.

66-52
Purpose Operation test/check (Japan only)
Section FAX
Item Operation
Function
Pseudo-ringer check
(Purpose)
Operation/procedure
Press [START] key.
The call sound of the machine and the pseudo-ring are generated.

AR-5726/5731 SIMULATION 6 - 41
[7] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE
1. Trouble code list Trouble code
Trouble
Main Sub Trouble contents
Trouble code detection
Trouble code code
Main Sub Trouble contents
detection F9 80 Printer PWB communication trouble
code code (Protocol)
A0 01 Security incompatibility error 81 Printer PWB communication trouble
E1 00 IMC PWB communication trouble MCU (Parity)
10 IMC PWB trouble 82 Printer PWB communication trouble
11 IMC PWB ASIC error (Overrun)
12 IMC PWB CODEC IC error 84 Printer PWB communication trouble
13 IMC PWB flash ROM error (Framing)
14 IMC PWB expaned memory module 88 Printer PWB communication trouble
(DIMM) error (Time-out)
15 IMC PWB page memory error H2 00 Main heater lamp thermistor open hard
/SRAM error detection
16 IMC PWB standard compression memory 01 Sub heater lamp thermistor open hard
error detection
17 IMC PWB smoothing IC error H3 00 Main heater lamp abnormally high
temperature hard detection trouble
80 IMC PWB communication trouble
(protocol) 01 Sub heater lamp abnormally high
temperature hard detection trouble
81 IMC PWB communication trouble
(Parity) 10 Main heater lamp abnormally high
temperature soft detection trouble
82 IMC PWB communication trouble
(Overrun) 11 Sub heater lamp abnormally high
temperature soft detection trouble
84 IMC PWB communication trouble
(Framing) H4 00 Main heater lamp abnormally low
temperature detection
88 IMC PWB communication trouble
(Time-out) 01 Sub heater lamp abnormally low
temperature detection
E7 02 LSU trouble
20 Main heater lamp abnormally low
10 CCD black level error
temperature detection
11 CCD white level error
21 Sub heater lamp abnormally low
12 Shading trouble temperature detection
F1 00 Finisher communication trouble FIN H5 01 10 times of continuous detection of the
03 Delivery roller lift motor trouble lower paper exit sensor (POD1) lead edge
10 Staple motor trouble jam or the upper paper exit sensor
15 Tray lift motor trouble (POD2) lead edge jam or the duplex
sensor (PPD2) rear edge jam
19 Paper alignment motor F trouble
L1 00 Scanner feed trouble
20 Paper alignment motor R trouble
L3 00 Scanner return trouble
37 RAM data trouble
L4 01 Main motor trouble
50 Incompatible trouble
11 Shifter motor trouble
95 Paper exit option configuration error
31 VFM trouble
F2 02 Toner supply failure
32 DCFM or DCFM2 trouble
04 Model error
33 VFM2 trouble
Type error
L6 10 Polygon motor trouble
Destination error
L8 10 Power abnormality detection trouble
Data abnormality
U1 01 FAX battery error
Misc error
02 PANEL LOW battery error
05 CRUM chip communication error
U2 04 EEPROM communication error
F5 02 Copy lamp (xenon lamp) error
20 Machine speed code data error
F6 00 FAX control PWB communication trouble MCU
U7 00 RIC communication trouble
10 FAX control PWB trouble
U9 00 Operation control PWB communication OPE
80 FAX control PWB communication trouble trouble
(Protocol)
80 Operation control PWB communication
81 FAX control PWB communication trouble trouble (Protocol)
(Parity)
81 Operation control PWB communication
82 FAX control PWB communication trouble trouble (Parity)
(Overrun)
82 Operation control PWB communication
84 FAX control PWB communication trouble trouble (Overrun)
(Framing)
84 Operation control PWB communication
88 FAX control PWB communication trouble trouble (Framing)
(Time-out)
88 Operation control PWB communication
96 Combination error between the MCU and trouble (Time-out)
the FAX firmware.
99 Operation panel destination error
99 FAX control PWB destination error
F9 00 Printer PWB communication trouble MCU
10 Printer PWB trouble

AR-5726/5731 SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 - 1


Trouble code Trouble
Trouble
Main Sub Trouble contents code
detection Details of trouble
code code Main Sub
EE EL Developer adjustment trouble code code
(Over-toned abnormality) E1 14 Content IMC PWB expanded memory module
EU Developer adjustment trouble (DIMM) error
(Under-toned abnormality) Details IMC extended compression memory
PF 00 PF trouble module (DIMM) installation error.
IMC extended compression memory
2. Details of trouble code module (DIMM) access error.
Cause IMC expanded memory module installation
Trouble trouble.
code IMC expanded memory module trouble.
Details of trouble
Main Sub IMC expanded memory contact trouble.
code code IMC PWB abnormality.
A0 01 Content Security incompatibility error Check Check installation of the expanded
Details When the PCL or the FAX control PWB is and memory module. (Spec: Added to Slot 1.)
installed, it does not match with remedy Replace the expanded memory module.
compatible/incompatible setup of the MCU Replace the IMC PWB.
PWB security.
Remarks Extend memory abnormality for
Cause The security compatibility/incompatibility of compressed image store (DIMM module)
the installed PCL or FAX control PWB
does not match with that of the MCU PWB. 15 Content IMC PWB page memory error
/SRAM error
Check Cheek the security compatibility/
and incompatibility of each board. Match the Details IMC PWB page memory or work SRAM
remedy security compatibility/incompatibility of the access error
boards. Cause IMC PWB abnormality
E1 00 Content IMC PWB communication trouble Check Replace the IMC PWB
Details Communication trouble between MCU and and
IMC PWB remedy
Cause IMC PWB connector disconnection. Remarks Print buffer page memory or work SRAM
abnormality
Motherboard connector pin breakage.
16 Content IMC PWB standard compression memory
IMC PWB ROM defect, data failure. error
Check Check the connectors of the IMC PWB and Details Access error of standard compression
and MCU PWB. memory on IMC PWB
remedy Check the grounding of the copier. Cause IMC PWB abnormality
Check the ROM of the IMC PWB. Check Replace the IMC PWB
10 Content IMC PWB trouble and
Details IMC PWB hardware abnormality remedy
Cause IMC PWB abnormality Remarks Standard compression image store
Check Replace the IMC PWB memory abnormality
and 17 Content IMC PWB smoothing IC error
remedy Details IMC PWB smoothing IC abnormality
11 Content IMC PWB ASIC error Cause IMC PWB abnormality
Details ASIC abnormality on IMC PWB Check Replace the IMC PWB
Cause IMC PWB abnormality and
Check Replace the IMC PWB remedy
and 80 Content IMC PWB communication trouble
remedy (protocol)
12 Content IMC PWB CODEC IC error Details Communication trouble between MCU and
Details CODEC IC (JBIG chip) abnormality on IMC PWB (Protocol error)
IMC PWB Cause IMC PWB connector disconnection.
Cause IMC PWB abnormality Motherboard connector pin breakage.
Check Replace the IMC PWB IMC PWB ROM defect, data failure.
and Check Check the connectors of the IMC PWB and
remedy and MCU PWB.
E1 13 Content IMC PWB flash ROM error remedy Check the grounding of the copier.
Details Flash ROM abnormality on IMC PWB Check the ROM of the IMC PWB.
Cause IMC PWB abnormality 81 Content IMC PWB communication trouble (Parity)
Check Replace the IMC PWB. Details Communication trouble between MCU and
and When the program download is abnormally printer IMC (Parity error)
remedy terminated, a error may occur. In this case, Cause IMC PWB connector disconnection.
download the program again. Motherboard connector pin breakage.
Remarks Program ROM abnormality IMC PWB ROM defect, data failure.
Check Check the connectors of the IMC PWB and
and MCU PWB.
remedy Check the grounding of the copier.
Check the ROM of the IMC PWB.

AR-5726/5731 SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 - 2


Trouble Trouble
code code
Details of trouble Details of trouble
Main Sub Main Sub
code code code code
E1 82 Content IMC PWB communication trouble E7 11 Content CCD white level error
(Overrun) Details Improper CCD white reference plate
Details Communication trouble between MCU and reading level for copy lamp lighting
IMC PWB (Overrun error) Cause Flat cable installation failure to CCD unit.
Cause IMC PWB connector disconnection. Dirt on the mirror, lens, and reference
Motherboard connector pin breakage. white plate.
IMC PWB ROM defect, data failure. Copy lamp lighting trouble.
CCD unit abnormality.
Check Check the connectors of the IMC PWB and MCU PWB abnormality. (Occurred in the
and MCU PWB. RSPF scan position)
remedy Check the grounding of the copier. Check Clean the mirror, the lens, and the
Check the ROM of the IMC PWB. and reference white plate.
84 Content IMC PWB communication trouble remedy Check the copy lamp light quantity and its
(Framing) operation. (SIM 5-3)
Details Communication trouble between MCU and Check CCD unit.
IMC PWB (Framing error) Check MCU PWB.
Cause IMC PWB connector disconnection. 12 Content Shading trouble
Motherboard connector pin breakage. Details White correction is not completed in the
specified number of times.
IMC PWB ROM defect, data failure.
Cause Flat cable installation failure to CCD unit.
Check Check the connectors of the IMC PWB and
and MCU PWB. Dirt on the mirror, lens, and reference.
remedy white plate.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Copy lamp lighting trouble.
Check the ROM of the IMC PWB.
CCD unit abnormality.
88 Content IMC PWB communication trouble
(Time-out) MCU PWB abnormality.
Details Communication trouble between MCU and Check Clean the mirror, the lens, and the
IMC PWB (Time-out error) and reference white plate.
remedy Check the copy lamp light quantity and its
Cause IMC PWB connector disconnection.
operation. (SIM 5-3)
Motherboard connector pin breakage. Check CCD unit.
IMC PWB ROM defect, data failure. Check MCU PWB.
Check Check the connectors of the IMC PWB and F1 00 Content Finisher communication trouble
and MCU PWB. Details Communication line test error occurs when
remedy Check the grounding of the copier. power is turned on or after the exit of a
Check the ROM of the IMC PWB. simulation mode.
E7 02 Content LSU trouble Error in finisher communication
Cause Connection trouble or disconnection of the
Details BD signal from LSU is not detected in a
connector and harness between the body
constant cycle (Kept OFF or ON)
and the finisher.
Cause LSU connector or LSU inside harness Finisher control PWB trouble.
trouble or disconnection. Control PWB failure.
Polygon motor rotation abnormality. Malfunction by noises.
Laser does not illuminate. Check Canceled by turning OFF/ON the power.
MCU PWB failure. and Check the connectors and the harness of
Check Check for disconnection of the LSU remedy communication line.
and connector. Replace the finisher control PWB.
remedy Check the LSU operation with SIM 61-1. 03 Content Delivery roller lift motor trouble
Check that the polygon motor rotates Details Paper exit roller lift-up motor operation
normally. abnormality
Check laser LED lighting. Cause Motor lock.
Replace the LSU unit. Motor rpm abnormality.
Replace the MCU PWB. Overcurrent to the motor.
10 Content CCD black level error Finisher control PWB trouble.
Details CCD black reference plate scan level Check Use SIM3-3 to check the delivery roller lift
abnormality when the copy lamp turns off. and motor operation
remedy
Cause Flat cable installation failure to CCD unit.
CCD unit error. 10 Content Staple motor trouble
Check Check flat cable installation to the CCD Details Staple motor operation abnormality
and unit. Cause Motor lock.
remedy Check CCD unit. Motor rpm abnormality.
Overcurrent to the motor.
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Check Use SIM 3-3 to check the staple motor
and operation.
remedy

AR-5726/5731 SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 - 3


Trouble Trouble
code code
Details of trouble Details of trouble
Main Sub Main Sub
code code code code
F1 15 Content Tray lift motor trouble F2 04 Content Model error
Details The finisher lift-up motor does not reach Type error
the specified position Destination error
Cause Lift-up motor abnormality. Data abnormality
Lift-up motor upper limit sensor Misc error
abnormality. Details (Model error)
Finisher PWB abnormality.
When the boot program model code does
Check Use SIM 3-3 to check the lift-up motor not match with the CRUM model
and operation information
remedy (Type error)
19 Content Paper alignment motor F trouble When the CRUM type is other than
Details Alignment motor operation abnormality [Genuine/Conversion/Production rotation]
Cause Motor lock. (Destination error)
Motor rpm abnormality. The destination of the body differs from
Overcurrent to the motor. that of the CRUM
Finisher control PWB trouble. (Data abnormality)
Check Use SIM3-3 to check the alignment (F) The initial check information includes an
and motor operation. erroneous value.
remedy When the max. toner supply time is 00.
20 Content Paper alignment motor R trouble When the print hard stop is 00.
Details Alignment motor operation abnormality Cause CRUM chip failure.
Cause Motor lock. Erroneous TNCA.
Motor rpm abnormality. Check Replace the CRUM chip.
Overcurrent to the motor. and Replace the TNCA.
Finisher control PWB trouble. remedy
Check Use SIM3-3 to check the alignment (R) 05 Content CRUM chip communication error
and motor operation Cause CRUM chip failure.
remedy Developing unit contact trouble.
37 Content RAM data trouble MCU PWB failure.
Details Backup RAM contents are disturbed Check Check installation of the developing unit.
Cause Finisher control PWB trouble. and Replace the MCU PWB.
Malfunction by noise. remedy
Check Replace the finisher control PWB. F5 02 Content Copy lamp (xenon lamp) error
and Details The copy lamp does not light up
remedy Cause Copy lamp abnormality.
50 Content Incompatible trouble Copy lamp harness abnormality.
Details Speed does not coincide between finisher CCD PWB harness abnormality.
and main unit
Check Check the copy lamp. (SIM 5-3)
A finisher which is not applicable is and When the lamp lights:
installed. remedy Check the harnesses and connectors
Cause Connection of a finisher incompatible with between the CCD unit and the MCU PWB.
the machine is detected. When the lamp does not light:
Check Connect the MX-FN13 to the machine. Check the harness and connector between
and the copy lamp and the MCU PWB.
remedy
Replace the copy lamp unit.
95 Content Paper exit option configuration error Replace the MCU PWB.
Details An improper option is installed. F6 00 Content FAX control PWB communication trouble
Cause Configuration of the paper exit option is
Details Communication trouble between MCU and
improperness.
FAX control PWB
Check Install a proper option. Cause FAX control PWB connector
and disconnection.
remedy
Harness trouble between FAX control
F2 02 Content Toner supply failure PWB and MCU PWB.
Details The value judged from the actual toner
Motherboard connector pin breakage.
supply hysteresis differs greatly from the
toner sensor value FAX control PWB ROM defect/Data failure.
Cause Developing unit trouble. Check Check the connectors and the harness of
and FAX control PWB and MCU PWB.
Toner supply abnormality caused by remedy
installation of unpacked toner cartridge. Check the grounding of the copier.
Check Replace the developing unit. Check FAX control PWB ROM.
and Use SIM 25-1 to perform DV stirring. 10 Content FAX control PWB trouble
remedy Details FAX control PWB abnormality
Cause FAX control PWB defect
Check Replate the FAX control PWB
and
remedy

AR-5726/5731 SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 - 4


Trouble Trouble
code code
Details of trouble Details of trouble
Main Sub Main Sub
code code code code
F6 80 Content FAX control PWB communication trouble F6 88 Content FAX control PWB communication trouble
(Protocol) (Time-out)
Details Communication trouble between MCU and Details Communication trouble between MCU and
FAX control PWB (Protocol error) FAX control PWB (Time-out error)
Cause FAX control PWB connector disconnection Cause FAX control PWB connector
Harness trouble between FAX control disconnection.
PWB and MCU PWB. Harness trouble between FAX control
Motherboard connector pin breakage. PWB and MCU PWB.
FAX control PWB ROM defect/Data failure. Motherboard connector pin breakage.
Check Check the connectors and the harness of FAX control PWB ROM defect/Data failure.
and FAX control PWB and MCU PWB. Check Check the connectors and the harness of
remedy Check the grounding of the copier. and FAX control PWB and MCU PWB.
remedy Check the grounding of the copier.
Check FAX control PWB ROM.
81 Content FAX control PWB communication trouble Check FAX control PWB ROM.
(Parity) 96 Content Combination error between the MCU and
Details Communication trouble between MCU and the FAX firmware.
FAX control PWB (Parity error) Details The version of the FAX firmware is not
Cause FAX control PWB connector disconnection changed “04.xx” or later.
Harness trouble between FAX control Cause The version of the FAX firmware is not
PWB and MCU PWB. proper.
Motherboard connector pin breakage. Check Change the version of the FAX firmware to
FAX control PWB ROM defect/Data failure. and “04.xx” or later.
remedy
Check Check the connectors and the harness of
and FAX control PWB and MCU PWB. 99 Content FAX control PWB destination error
remedy Details The machine destination setup does not
Check the grounding of the copier.
coincide with the FAX control PWB
Check FAX control PWB ROM. destination setup.
82 Content FAX control PWB communication trouble Cause The machine destination setup (Sim 26-6)
(Overrun) does not coincide with the FAX control
Details Communication trouble between MCU and PWB setup
FAX control PWB (Overrun error) Check Check the variety of FAX LIU PWB.
Cause FAX control PWB connector and Check the machine destination setup (Sim
disconnection. remedy 22-6) and FAX country code (Soft SW
Harness trouble between FAX control table).
PWB and MCU PWB. F9 00 Content Printer PWB communication trouble
Motherboard connector pin breakage. Details Communication trouble between MCU and
FAX control PWB ROM defect/Data failure. printer PWB
Check Check the connectors and the harness of Cause Printer PWB connector disconnection.
and FAX control PWB and MCU PWB. Harness trouble between the printer PWB
remedy Check the grounding of the copier. and the MCU PWB.
Check FAX control PWB ROM. Motherboard connector pin breakage.
84 Content FAX control PWB communication trouble Printer PWB ROM defect/Data failure.
(Framing) Check Check the connectors and the harness of
Details Communication trouble between MCU and and the printer PWB and MCU PWB.
FAX control PWB (Framing error) remedy Check the grounding of the copier.
Cause FAX control PWB connector Check ROM on printer PWB.
disconnection.
10 Content Printer PWB trouble
Harness trouble between FAX control
PWB and MCU PWB. Details Printer PWB abnormality
Cause Printer PWB defect
Motherboard connector pin breakage.
FAX control PWB ROM defect/Data failure. Check Replace the printer PWB
and
Check Check the connectors and the harness of remedy
and FAX control PWB and MCU PWB.
remedy 80 Content Printer PWB communication trouble
Check the grounding of the copier. (Protocol)
Check FAX control PWB ROM. Details Communication trouble between MCU and
printer PWB (Protocol error)
Cause Printer PWB connector disconnection.
Harness trouble between the printer PWB
and the MCU PWB.
Motherboard connector pin breakage.
Printer PWB ROM defect/Data failure.
Check Check the connectors and the harness of
and the printer PWB and MCU PWB.
remedy Check the grounding of the copier.
Check ROM on printer PWB.

AR-5726/5731 SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 - 5


Trouble Trouble
code code
Details of trouble Details of trouble
Main Sub Main Sub
code code code code
F9 81 Content Printer PWB communication trouble H2 01 Content Sub heater lamp thermistor open hard
(Parity) detection
Details Communication trouble between MCU and Details Fusing sub thermistor open detection.
printer PWB (Parity error) Fusing unit not installed.
Cause Printer PWB connector disconnection. Cause Sub thermistor defect.
Harness trouble between the printer PWB Control PWB failure.
and the MCU PWB. Fusing section connector contact failure.
Motherboard connector pin breakage. Fusing unit not installed.
Printer PWB ROM defect/Data failure. Check Check the harness and the connector of
Check Check the connectors and the harness of and the thermistor and the MCU.
and the printer PWB and MCU PWB. remedy
remedy Check the grounding of the copier. H3 00 Content Main heater lamp abnormally high
Check ROM on printer PWB. temperature hard detection trouble
82 Content Printer PWB communication trouble Details The fusing main heater thermistor causes
(Overrun) abnormally high temperature
Details Communication trouble between MCU and Cause Main thermistor defect.
printer PWB (Overrun error) Control PWB failure.
Cause Printer PWB connector disconnection. Fusing section connector contact failure.
Harness trouble between the printer PWB Check Check the main heater lamp blinking with
and the MCU PWB. and SIM 5-2-1.
remedy When the lamp blinks normally:
Motherboard connector pin breakage.
Check the thermistor and the harness.
Printer PWB ROM defect/Data failure. Check the MCU PWB thermistor input
Check Check the connectors and the harness of circuit.
and the printer PWB and MCU PWB. If lamp lights and stays lit:
remedy Check the grounding of the copier. Check the power circuit and the lamp
Check ROM on printer PWB. control circuit on MCU PWB.
84 Content Printer PWB communication trouble Clear the display of self-diagnostics with
(Framing) SIM 14.
Details Communication trouble between MCU and 01 Content Sub heater lamp abnormally high
printer PWB (Framing error) temperature hard detection trouble
Cause Printer PWB connector disconnection. Details The fusing sub thermistor causes
Harness trouble between the printer PWB abnormally high temperature
and the MCU PWB. Cause Sub thermistor defect.
Motherboard connector pin breakage. Control PWB failure.
Fusing section connector contact failure.
Printer PWB ROM defect/Data failure.
Check Check the sub heater lamp blinking with
Check Check the connectors and the harness of
and SIM 5-2-2.
and the printer PWB and MCU PWB.
remedy When the lamp blinks normally:
remedy Check the grounding of the copier.
Check the thermistor and the harness.
Check ROM on printer PWB. Check the MCU PWB thermistor input
88 Content Printer PWB communication trouble circuit.
(Time-out) If lamp lights and stays lit:
Details Communication trouble between MCU and Check the power circuit and the lamp
printer PWB (Time-out error) control circuit on MCU PWB.
Cause Printer PWB connector disconnection. Clear the display of self-diagnostics with
Harness trouble between the printer PWB SIM 14.
and the MCU PWB. 10 Content Main heater lamp abnormally high
Motherboard connector pin breakage. temperature soft detection trouble
Printer PWB ROM defect/Data failure. Details A/D value the fusing main thermistor
Check Check the connectors and the harness of causes abnormally high temperature (over
and the printer PWB and MCU PWB. 230°C).
remedy Cause Main heater lamp thermistor defect.
Check the grounding of the copier.
Control PWB failure.
Check ROM on printer PWB. Fusing section connector contact failure.
H2 00 Content Main heater lamp thermistor open hard Check Check the main heater lamp blinking with
detection and SIM 5-2-1.
Details Main heater lamp thermistor open remedy When the lamp blinks normally:
detection. Check the thermistor and the harness.
Fusing unit not installed. Check the MCU PWB thermistor input
Cause Main thermistor defect. circuit.
Control PWB failure. If lamp lights and stays lit:
Fusing section connector contact failure. Check the power circuit and the lamp
Fusing unit not installed. control circuit on MCU PWB.
Check Check the harness and the connector of Clear the display of self-diagnostics with
and the thermistor and the MCU. SIM 14.
remedy

AR-5726/5731 SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 - 6


Trouble Trouble
code code
Details of trouble Details of trouble
Main Sub Main Sub
code code code code
H3 11 Content Sub heater lamp abnormally high H4 01 Content Sub heater lamp abnormally low
temperature soft detection trouble temperature detection
Details A/D value the fusing sub heater lamp Details The setup temperature (about 90°C) is not
thermistor causes abnormally high reached within the specified time (about
temperature (over 230°C). 20sec) from turning on the power.
Cause Sub heater lamp thermistor defect. When the temperature of sub heater
Control PWB failure. thermistor falls below 140°C in the standby
Fusing section connector contact failure. mode or printing.
Check Check the sub heater lamp blinking with When the temperature of sub heater lamp
and SIM 5-2-2. thermistor falls below 50°C in the pre-heat
remedy When the lamp blinks normally: mode.
Check the thermistor and the harness. Cause Sub heater lamp thermistor defect.
Check the MCU PWB thermistor input circuit. Sub heater lamp failure.
If lamp lights and stays lit: Sub thermostat failure.
Check the power circuit and the lamp
Control PWB failure.
control circuit on MCU PWB.
Check Check the sub heater lamp blinking with
Clear the display of self-diagnostics with and SIM 5-2-2.
SIM 14. remedy When the lamp blinks normally:
H4 00 Content Main heater lamp abnormally low Check the thermistor and the harness.
temperature detection
Check the MCU PWB thermistor input circuit.
Details The setup temperature (about 90°C) is not
reached within the specified time (about If lamp lights and stays lit:
20sec) from turning on the power. Check the power circuit and the lamp
control circuit on MCU PWB.
When the temperature of main heater
lamp thermistor falls below 140°C in the Clear the display of self-diagnostics with
standby mode or printing. SIM 14.
When the temperature of main heater 20 Content Main heater lamp abnormally low
lamp thermistor falls below 50°C in the temperature detection
pre-heat mode. Details The setup temperature (about –25°C: Sim
Cause Main heater lamp thermistor defect 43-1-1) is not reached within the specified
time (about 40sec) from turning on the power.
Main heater lamp failure
A/D value of fusing main thermistor is not
Main thermostat failure reached within the specified temperature.
Control PWB failure (specified temperature : SIM43-1 (600dpi)
Check Check the heater lamp blinking with SIM 5-2. –25°C )
and When the lamp blinks normally: Cause Main thermistor defect.
remedy Check the thermistor and the harness. Main heater lamp failure.
Check the MCU PWB thermistor input circuit. Main thermostat failure.
If lamp lights and stays lit: Control PWB failure.
Check for disconnection of the heater lamp Check Check the main heater lamp blinking with
and thermostat. and SIM 5-1.
Check the interlock switch. remedy When the lamp blinks normally:
Check the power circuit and the lamp Check the thermistor and the harness.
control circuit on MCU PWB. Check the MCU PWB thermistor input circuit.
Clear the display of self-diagnostics with If lamp lights and stays lit:
SIM 14. Check the power circuit and the lamp
control circuit on MCU PWB.
Clear the display of self-diagnostics with
SIM 14.
Check that there is no foreign material in
the contact section between the thermistor
and the heat roller.

AR-5726/5731 SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 - 7


Trouble Trouble
code code
Details of trouble Details of trouble
Main Sub Main Sub
code code code code
H4 21 Content Sub heater lamp abnormally low L1 00 Content Scanner feed trouble
temperature detection Details Scanner feed is not completed within the
Details The setup temperature (about –25°C: Sim specified time.
43-1-1) is not reached within the specified Cause Mirror unit defect.
time (about 40sec) from turning on the
Scanner wire disconnection.
power.
Origin detection sensor error.
A/D value of fusing sub thermistor is not
reached within the specified temperature Mirror motor harness abnormality.
(specified temperature : SIM43-1 (600dpi) Check Check the scanning operation with SIM 1-
–25°C ) and 1.
Cause Sub thermistor defect. remedy When the mirror not feeds:
Sub heater lamp failure. Check for disconnection of the scanner
wire.
Sub thermostat failure.
Check the harness and connector between
Control PWB failure.
the mirror motor and the MCU PWB.
Check Check the sub heater lamp blinking with Replace the mirror unit.
and SIM 5-2-2.
remedy Replace the MCU PWB.
When the lamp blinks normally:
Check the thermistor and the harness. When the mirror feeds:
Check the mirror home position sensor
Check the MCU PWB thermistor input with SiM 1-2.
circuit.
L3 00 Content Scanner return trouble
If lamp lights and stays lit:
Check the power circuit and the lamp Details Scanner return is not completed within the
control circuit on MCU PWB. specified time.
Clear the display of self-diagnostics with When OC copying with the mirror at the
SIM 14. home position, the mirror is not in the
home position.
Check that there is no foreign material in
the contact section between the thermistor Cause Mirror unit defect.
and the heat roller. The scanner wire is disconnected.
H5 01 Content 10 times of continuous detection of the Origin detection sensor error.
lower paper exit sensor (POD1) lead edge Mirror motor harness abnormality.
jam or the upper paper exit sensor (POD2) Check Check the scanning operation with SIM 1-
lead edge jam or the duplex sensor and 1.
(PPD2) rear edge jam remedy When the mirror fails to return:
Details After supplying the power, one of the Check for disconnection of the scanner
above jams occurs 10 times continuously wire.
in printing
Check the harness and connector between
Counting is started on supplying the the mirror motor and the MCU PWB.
power. When any one of the above jams
Replace the mirror unit.
occurs, one count is made. When paper
entry to the POD1 or POD2 is detected, Replace the MCU PWB.
the counter is cleared. When the mirror feeds:
Cause A paper jam (paper rounding, etc.) near Check the mirror home position sensor
the duplex sensor (PPD2) on the fusing with SiM 1-2.
unit is not canceled completely. L4 01 Content Main motor trouble
POD1, POD2, PPD2 sensor breakdown or Details The main motor does not rotate.
harness connection trouble The motor lock signal is detected for 1sec
Fusing unit installation failure or more after the main motor rotates.
Check Check for jam paper in the fusing section. The motor lock signal is detected for 1sec
and (paper winding, etc.) during rotation of the main motor.
remedy Check fusing unit installation. Cause Main motor defect.
Check the POD1, POD2 or PPD2 sensor. Main motor connection, harness trouble or
Clear the trouble with SIM 14. disconnection.
MCU PWB failure.
Check Check the main motor operation with SIM
and 25-1.
remedy Check connection of the main motor
harness and connector.
Replace the main motor.
Replace the MCU PWB.

AR-5726/5731 SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 - 8


Trouble Trouble
code code
Details of trouble Details of trouble
Main Sub Main Sub
code code code code
L4 11 Content Shifter motor trouble L6 10 Content Polygon motor lock trouble
Details The shifter home position detection signal Details The polygon motor does not rotate.
is not detected when the shifter is The motor lock signal is detected for 18sec
operating. or more after the polygon motor rotates.
Cause Shifter motor trouble or harnes connection The motor lock signal is detected for 1sec
trouble and disconnection. during rotation of the polygon motor.
Shifter home position sensor trouble. Cause Polygon motor unit failure
Check Check the shifter motor operation with SIM Polygon motor connection, harness trouble
and 3-11. or disconnection
remedy Check connection of the shifter motor MCU PWB failure
harness/connector. Check Check the polygon motor operation with
Replace the shifter motor. and SIM 61-1.
Replace the MCU PWB. remedy Check the connectors and the harness of
31 Content VFM fan trouble polygon motor
Details 5 sec after starting the fan motor rotation, Replace the polygon motor.
the motor lock signal is detected for 1 sec. Replace the MCU PWB.
During rotation of the fan motor, the motor L8 10 Content Power abnormality detection trouble
lock signal is detected for 1 sec. Details The power status monitoring signal keeps
Cause Fan motor trouble. power OFF state after passing the
Fan motor connection harness connection specified time (2sec).
trouble or disconnection. Cause Circuit around the power status monitoring
MCU PWB trouble. signal (PSSTS) failure.
Check Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the Check Check whether power status monitoring
and fan motor. and signal (PSSTS) on MCU PWB is OPEN or
remedy Check connection of the fan motor remedy not.
harness and connector. Replace MCU PWB.
Replace the fan motor. U1 01 Content FAX battery error
Replace the MCU PWB. Details The SRAM backup battery voltage on FAX
32 Content DCFM or DCFM2 fan trouble control PWB falls.
Details 5 sec after starting the fan motor rotation, Cause The SRAM backup battery voltage on FAX
the motor lock signal is detected for 1 sec. control PWB falls.
During rotation of the fan motor, the motor Check Check voltage of the SRAM back up
lock signal detected for 1 sec. and battery.
remedy Replace the battery.
Cause Fan motor trouble.
Fan motor connection harness connection 02 Content PANEL LOW battery error
trouble or disconnection. Details The voltage of the panel clock function
MCU PWB trouble. battery falls.
Check Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the Cause The voltage of the panel clock function
and fan motor. battery falls.
remedy Check connection of the fan motor Check Check voltage of panel clock function
harness and connector. and battery.
remedy Replace the battery.
Replace the fan motor.
Replace the MCU PWB. U2 04 Content EEPROM communication error
33 Content VFM2 fan trouble Details EEPROM communication error
Details 5 sec after starting the fan motor rotation, Cause EEPROM defect.
the motor lock signal is detected for 1 sec. ICU PWB EEPROM access circuit failure.
During rotation of the fan motor, the motor Check Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
lock signal detected for 1 sec. and Clear trouble with SIM 16.
Cause Fan motor trouble. remedy Replace the MCU PWB.
Fan motor connection harness connection 20 Content Machine speed code data error
trouble or disconnection.
Details The machine boot speed information is not
MCU PWB trouble. identical to the model code speed
Check Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the information
and fan motor. Cause EEPROM defect.
remedy Check connection of the fan motor SIM operation error.
harness and connector.
Check Check for matching of the machine and
Replace the fan motor. and model information setting in SIM26-57.
Replace the MCU PWB. remedy

AR-5726/5731 SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 - 9


Trouble Trouble
code code
Details of trouble Details of trouble
Main Sub Main Sub
code code code code
U7 00 Content RIC communication trouble U9 84 Content Operation control PWB communication
Details Error in communication with RIC. trouble (Framing)
Error in communication test after turning Details Communication trouble between MCU and
on the power or canceling SIM. the operation control PWB (Framing error)
Cause Connector harness contact trouble or Cause Operation control PWB connector
disconnection. disconnection.
RIC control PWB trouble. Harness failure of the operation control
MCU PWB failure. PWB and the MCU PWB.
Malfunction by noises. Check Check the connectors and the harness of
Check Check the communication cable, and the operation control PWB and MCU PWB.
and connectors from the RIC box to the main remedy Check the grounding of the copier.
remedy body.
88 Content Operation control PWB communication
U9 00 Content Operation control PWB communication trouble (Time-out)
trouble
Details Communication trouble between MCU and
Details Communication trouble between MCU and
the operation PWB (Time-out error)
the operation control PWB
Cause Operation control PWB connector
Cause Operation control PWB connector disconnection.
disconnection
Harness failure of the operation control
Harness failure of the operation control PWB and the MCU PWB.
PWB and the MCU PWB
Check Check the connectors and the harness of
Check Check the connectors and the harness of
and the operation control PWB and MCU PWB.
and the operation control PWB and MCU PWB.
remedy Check the grounding of the copier.
remedy Check the grounding of the copier.
Check ROM on the operation control PWB. 99 Content Operation panel destination error
80 Content Operation control PWB communication Details An error occurred in checking the
trouble (Protocol) destination of the operation panel and the
main body.
Details Communication trouble between MCU and
the operation control PWB (Protocol error) Cause Erroneous connection the operation panel
unit.
Cause Operation control PWB connector
disconnection. SIM setup error.
Harness failure of the operation control. Check Check the destination information of the
PWB and the MCU PWB. and operation panel unit and the MCU.
remedy (Sim26-6/22)
Check Check the connectors and the harness of
and the operation control PWB and MCU PWB. EE EL Content Developer adjustment trouble (Over-toned
remedy abnormality)
Check the grounding of the copier.
Details An abnormality occurred in execution of
81 Content Operation control PWB communication automatic developer adjustment.
trouble (Parity)
Sample data was detected over-toner.
Details Communication trouble between MCU and
the operation control PWB (Parity error) Cause Toner concentration sensor abnormality.
Cause Operation control PWB connector Toner concentration trouble.
disconnection. Developing unit trouble.
Harness failure of the operation control MCU PWB failure.
PWB and the MCU PWB. Check Use SIM 25-2 to perform the auto
Check Check the connectors and the harness of and developer adjustment.
and the operation control PWB and MCU PWB. remedy
remedy Check the grounding of the copier. EU Content Developer adjustment trouble (Under-
82 Content Operation control PWB communication toned abnormality)
trouble (Overrun) Details An abnormality occurred in execution of
Details Communication trouble between MCU and automatic developer adjustment.
the operation control PWB (Overrun error) Sample data was detected under-toner.
Cause Operation control PWB connector Cause Toner concentration sensor abnormality.
disconnection. Toner concentration trouble.
Harness failure of the operation control Developing unit trouble.
PWB and the MCU PWB. MCU PWB failure.
Check Check the connectors and the harness of Check Use SIM 25-2 to perform the auto
and the operation control PWB and MCU PWB. and developer adjustment.
remedy Check the grounding of the copier. remedy
PF 00 Content PF trouble
Details The copy inhibit command from RIC is
received.
Cause Judged by the host.
Check Inform to the host.
and
remedy

AR-5726/5731 SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 7 - 10


[8] MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance list
(For 26cpm)
✕: Check (Check, clean, replace or adjust according to necessity.)
❍: Cleaning ▲: Replace ✩: Lubricate
Unit Parts 75k 150k 225k 300k 375k 450k 525k 600k Note
Process Drum ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Cleaner blade ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Seal F/R ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Drum frame unit Usable for three PM cycles
✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕
(Toner reception sheet)
MC unit ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Separation pawl unit ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
Star ring ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
DV Developer ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
Toner filter unit ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
DV blade ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
DV side sheet F ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
DV side sheet R ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
Toner sensor ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Fusing Upper heat roller ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲
Lower heat roller ❍ ❍ ❍ ▲ ❍ ❍ ❍ ▲
Upper separation pawl ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲
Upper cleaning pad ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
Lower separation pawl ❍ ❍ ❍ ▲ ❍ ❍ ❍ ▲
Thermistor ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Fuser gear ✩ ▲ ✩ ▲ ✩ ▲ ✩ ▲
Upper heat roller bearing ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
Lower fuser bearing ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲
Thermistor cleaning pad ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
Paper guide ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Paper feed Pickup roller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Changing criteria for parts: 100k
Paper feeding sheet ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Pickup roller and feed roller
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(RSPF)
Transport Transport roller unit ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲
Gear ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ –
Others Paper feed rollers ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Ozone filter ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 1
(For 31cpm)
✕: Check (Check, clean, replace or adjust according to necessity.)
❍: Cleaning ▲: Replace ✩: Lubricate
Unit Parts 100k 150k 200k 300k 400k 450k 500k 600k Note
Process Drum ▲ ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ✕ ▲ ▲
Cleaner blade ▲ ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ✕ ▲ ▲
Seal F/R ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Drum frame unit Usable for three PM cycles
✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲
(Toner reception sheet)
MC unit ▲ ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ✕ ▲ ▲
Separation pawl unit ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
Star ring ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲
DV Developer ▲ ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ✕ ▲ ▲
Toner filter unit ▲ ✕ ▲ ▲ ▲ ✕ ▲ ▲
DV blade ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
DV side sheet F ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
DV side sheet R ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
Toner sensor ✕ – ✕ ✕ ✕ – ✕ ✕
Fusing Upper heat roller ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲
Lower heat roller ❍ ❍ ❍ ▲ ❍ ❍ ❍ ▲
Upper separation pawl ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲
Upper cleaning pad ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
Lower separation pawl ❍ ❍ ❍ ▲ ❍ ❍ ❍ ▲
Thermistor ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Fuser gear ✩ ▲ ✩ ▲ ✩ ▲ ✩ ▲
Upper heat roller bearing ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
Lower fuser bearing ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲ ✕ ✕ ✕ ▲
Thermistor cleaning pad ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲ ✕ ▲
Paper guide ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Paper feed Pickup roller ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ Changing criteria for parts: 100k
Paper feeding sheet ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
Pickup roller and feed roller
✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕ ✕
(RSPF)
Transport Transport roller unit ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲ ❍ ▲
Gear ✕ – ✕ – ✕ – ✕ –
Others Paper feed rollers ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
Gears ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩ ✩
Ozone filter ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲ ▲

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 2
2. Details of Maintenance Unit Parts
L. Drive section (1) DUP reverse motor
(2) Main drive motor
Unit Parts
(3) Toner motor
A. Process unit (1) Drum (4) PS transport clutch
(2) Drum section a. Main charger (5) Paper feed clutch
b. Cleaning blade
(6) Drive unit
c. Drum frame unit (7) Lift up motor
d. Moquette F/R M. Transport section (1) Transport roller
e. Separation pawl
N. Operation section (1) Operation section
B. Developing unit (1) Developer (2) OPU PWB
(2) Toner filter unit (3) Key PWB
(3) DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R
(4) LCD unit
(4) DV blade O. Switch (1) Power switch
(5) Toner sensor P. RSPF (1) Document tray a. Document tray unit
C. Fusing section (1) Thermostat section b. Document length
(2) Thermistor sensor
(3) Paper guide c. Document width
(4) Fusing separation pawl (lower) resistor PWB
(5) Lower heat roller (2) Paper feed unit a. Paper feed clutch
(6) Heater lamp section b. Pickup roller
(7) Upper cleaning pad c. Paper feed roller
(8) Fusing separation pawl (upper) d. Paper feed unit
(9) Upper heat roller e. Separation sheet
(10) Thermistor cleaning pad f. Sensor
D. Optical section (1) CCD unit (3) Transport a. Transport unit
(2) Lamp unit a. Lamp section b. PS clutch
b. PWB c. Pressure release
c. Wire solenoid
d. Mirror motor d. RSPF motor
E. Paper feed (1) Paper feed solenoid e. Transport roller
section (2) Tray sensor PWB f. Roller
(3) Manual P-in sensor/Manual empty sensor g. Sensor
(4) Multi manual a. Paper feed roller/ h. Roller
paper feed pickup roller i. Roller
b. Reverse sensor (4) Base section a. Interface PWB
c. Separation sheet b. Solenoid
d. Clutch/solenoid c. Book sensor
(5) Upper 500 a. Paper feed roller/ d. Sensor
sheets tray pickup roller
paper feed b. Separation sheet
A. Process unit
(6) Lower 500 a. Paper feed roller/ (Note for servicing the OPC drums)
sheets tray pickup roller 1. Prevention of oily dirt attachment
paper feed b. Separation sheet Note:
c. Lift up unit • Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the OPC drum sur-
d. Transport clutch face. (Keep the unit away from oils and dust.)
e. Paper feed clutch • When replacing the OPC drum, cover the OPC drum with the protec-
f. Transport clutch tion sheet and hold the protection sheet.
g. Solenoid If it is required to hold the OPC drum directly, use enough care not to
h. Sensor PWB touch the cleaning blade area, 5mm inside from both edges of the
F. Side door unit (1) Transport roller unit OPC drum. (If a fingerprint or oily dirt is attached to the cleaning
blade area of the OPC drum, the cleaning blade may flip.)
(2) Transport roller
(3) DUP transport roller 5mm
(4) DUP motor
G. 1st paper exit unit (1) Cooling fan
(2) Transport/exit roller
H. Laser unit (1) LSU
5mm
I. Power unit (1) Power source
J. PWB (1) Option CN PWB
(2) IMC PWB
(3) MCU PWB
(4) Motherboard PWB
(5) Second interface PWB
K. Ozone filter

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 3
[Countermeasures] (2) Drum section
If a fingerprint is attached to the OPC drum surface erroneously, a. Main charger
perform the following countermeasures.
1) Use dry cloth to clean and remove the dirt. 1
4
2) Apply KYNAR to prevent blade flip.
[Check method] 1
2
Check to confirm that the OPC drum is free from fingerprints or oily dirt
and that the cleaning blade is completely cleaned by the following
method.
• Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x 8.5")
paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality in the image.
2. Prior exposure prevention
Note:
• Avoid servicing in a place where there is strong light.
• Do not expose the unit to light for a long time.
• Cover the OPC drum with light-blocking material. (When using
paper, use about 10 sheets of paper to block light.)
[Countermeasures]
If the OPC drum is erroneously exposed to light too much (prior expo- 3
sure), perform the following countermeasures.
1) Print half tone images on the whole surface of A4 (11" x 8.5") b. Cleaning blade
paper, and check to confirm that there is no irregular density area 1
in the previously exposed section.
2) Damages due to prior exposure may be recovered by keeping the
OPC drum for several hours. If, however, image are not recovered,
replace the OPC drum.
(1) Drum
2

1 2

4
3
c. Drum frame unit

Note: When installing the process unit in the main unit after replacing
the drum, process unit may not be able to install by reason of the
drum drive coupling position.
In this case, rotate the drum about 45 degrees and install again.

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 4
d. Moquette F/R B. Developing section
(1) Developer

Rotate the MG roller to discharge developer.

Note: If it disturbs the blade movement, replace it and attach new one.
e. Separation pawl
Disassembly* Hold the tip of the separation pawl and remove it.

Assembly* Press the center of the separation pawl and install it.

(2) Toner filter unit


With the guide AS (cover) removed, replace it.
When replacing, clean the guide AS.

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 5
(3) DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R (5) Toner sensor
• Execution of cleaning the sensor must be made after discharging
used DV in DV replacement.
• Without removing the MG roller, use waste cloth to remove toner
from the sensor surface in the arrow direction.

[DV side sheet F/ DV side sheet R attachment reference]

• Clean the sensor only after removing used DV when replacing DV.
Molt 0 0
Molt C. Fusing section
edge edge
reference reference
0.3 0.3

2
0.5 0 0 0.5
3
Projection edge Projection edge
reference reference

(4) DV blade 1

[DV blade attachment reference]


2

[Cross-section] 1
Bump 0
reference 1

0.5

0.5 0
Rib reference

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 6
(1) Thermostat (4) Fusing separation pawl (lower)
Note: When securing the lamp harness and the thermostat, the
tightening torque of the screw (4 positions) is 6-9 kgs.

(5) Lower heat roller

3
(2) Thermistor

2
2
1 4

(3) Paper guide

3
2

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 7
(6) Heater lamp (9) Upper heat roller

1
2

(7) Upper cleaning pad

(10) Thermistor cleaning pad

(8) Fusing separation pawl (upper)

2 2

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 8
D. Optical section
(1) CCD unit 2
1
1

3 1
1
2
1
1 2

3
3

1 1
2
1
3

5
4 2
4
1
3

a. Lamp

3
2

(2) Lamp unit


1

3 1
1
1
1 2
b. PWB
6
2 1

3
5

4
4

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 9
c. Wire (1) Paper feed solenoid

1 3

2 3

(2) Tray sensor PWB

3 2

(3) Manual P-in sensor/Manual empty sensor

d. Mirror motor

3
A

2 B

1 (4) Multi manual paper feed


a. Paper feed roller/pickup roller

E. Paper feed section

A Paper feed roller


B Pickup roller
C Separation sheet

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 10
c. Separation sheet

1)
1 2

2)

5
6
3)

3 4

∗ Slightly apply grease GP501MR (UKOG-0012QSZZ) around the


axis. One rice grain for each.
Installation*Install so that the cam transmit arm (1) comes under the d. Clutch/solenoid
roller arm (2).
(Clutch)

6
5
4
2 3
2

2 1
3

LOCK

2
1
2
4

b. Reverse sensor 1

2 (Solenoid)
3

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 11
(Clutch) (5) Upper 500 sheets tray paper feed
a. Paper feed roller/pickup roller
A

A
A A

1
4

3 2

1
3

Note: With the toner cartridge installed, do not tilt or shake the devel-
oper cartridge.

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 12
4

1
3

2 4

b. Separation sheet

1
3

3
4
1 2 3

∗ When replacing, be careful not Slightly apply grease GE676


to adhere conduction grease (UKOG-0013QSZZ) to the
(black) to the drive section. drum boss.
3

2 1

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 13
1 1
1)

3
2 2

4
2
b. Separation sheet

∗ Slightly apply grease GP501MR (UKOG-0012QSZZ) around the


axis. One rice grain for each.
Grease should not come out when assembling.
(6) Lower 500 sheets tray paper feed
a. Paper feed roller/pickup roller

∗ Slightly apply grease GP501MR (UKOG-0012QSZZ) around the


axis. One rice grain for each.
Grease should not come out when assembling.

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 14
c. Lift up unit

1
1

2
d. Transport clutch g. Solenoid

2 1
1
3

3
2

h. Sensor PWB

e. Paper feed clutch

2
3
1
3
3
2

F. Side door unit


(1) Transport roller unit
3

f. Transport clutch

1 1

∗ Check that two springs are securely inserted into the transfer roller
unit bosses.

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 15
(2) Transport roller (4) DUP motor

2 4
1 1
1

2
3 2
3 3

1 2
1

G. 1st paper exit unit


(3) DUP transport roller (1) Cooling fan

3 3
2

3
3

3
1

4 1
1
3
2

5
3
2 1
4
5
2

3
1
1
2 2

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 16
(2) Transport/exit roller

(Except North America)

2 2
2
2

1 1
3
1

4
1

3 2

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 17
2

1
1

2
1

H. Laser unit
2
Note: Do not disassemble the LSU unit.
1 (1) LSU
1) Turn OFF the machine power, and disconnect the power plug from
the power outlet.
2) Remove the left cabinet and exit tray.
3) Disconnect the LSU connector, and remove the securing screws to
remove the LSU.

Note: Check to confirm that the solenoid shaft is in the gate bracket,
and fix with the screw.

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 18
2
2
1 2
1
2
2

2 3
2

2
I. Power unit
(1) Power source

1
2

J. PWB
(1) Option CN PWB

3
1
1

1 2 1

1
1
3
4
1 2 3

2 2

2
3
2 1
1

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 19
(2) IMC PWB (4) Motherboard PWB

1
2

1
1 1

(3) MCU PWB 1

1
3
3
3
2

1
3

2
3
1

1
1

1
2

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 20
(5) Second interface PWB

2 3

2
1
2
1

K. Ozone filter

1
2

1
3
1

2 3
1

3
1

1
2
1

1
2
1

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 21
(3) Toner motor

(4) PS transport clutch

1
L. Drive section
(1) DUP reverse motor 2

3
4

3
2

(2) Main drive motor

2
1

2
1
3

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 22
(5) Paper feed clutch (7) Lift up motor

3 1
1
2

3
2
2
1

(6) Drive unit

3 1
4

3
3 M. Transport section
2 2
(1) Transport roller

Drive unit (Grease application part)

2
1

2
1

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 23
(2) OPU PWB

2
3 1

(3) Key PWB

N. Operation section
(1) Operation section

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 24
(4) LCD unit P. RSPF
(1) Document tray section
a. Document tray unit

2
2
2

O. Switch
2
(1) Power switch

2 4

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 25
b. Document length sensor (2) Paper feed unit section
a. Paper feed clutch

2
1
1
1

2
2

b. Pickup roller

c. Document width resistor PWB

1
1
2

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 26
c. Paper feed roller d. Paper feed unit

1
2

2
3

e. Separation sheet

2
3

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 27
f. Sensor b. PS clutch

3
2

1
2
1 1

c. Pressure release solenoid

(3) Transport section


a. Transport unit
2 2

d. RSPF motor
3

2 2
1

1
3
1 1
1
2
1 1

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 28
f. Roller

2
1
2
1

1
<Note for disassembling the motor>
The motor is positioned by the jig. Use the mark when assembling
it to the original position.
e. Transport roller

1 1
1 2

g. Sensor

2
3

2
1
1

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 29
h. Roller (4) Base section
a. Interface PWB

1 1 1

1 2

b. Solenoid

1 1
2
4 3
4
2

1 3

2 N
O R GI
I

i. Roller

1 3
1
2

c. Book sensor

1 2 3

2
1

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 30
d. Sensor

1 2

3. Other related items


A. Counter clear
Item SIM Remarks
Maintenance cycle setting SIM 21-1
Jam/trouble counter clear SIM 24-1
Paper feed counter clear SIM 24-2
Scan/Stapler counter clear SIM 24-3
Maintenance counter clear SIM 24-4 *
Developing counter clear SIM 24-5 After execution of SIM25-2,
this counter is cleared.
Copy counter clear SIM 24-6
Drum counter clear SIM 24-7 At drum replacement
Printer, IMC, Duplex, other SIM 24-9
counter clear
FAX counter clear SIM 24-10
Scanner mode counter clear SIM 24-15
∗ 31 sheet model: When maintenance message is displayed, replace
consumption part reaching the number of sheets of maintenance,
then clear the replaced part's counter only.

AR-5726/5731 MAINTENANCE 8 - 31
[9] FIRMWARE UPDATE A. Firmware update method
(for Copier, and fax firm)
1. Firmware update procedure Following operational procedures are for:
• Copier firm
(Necessary items for update) • fax firm
A Personal computer
1) Make sure copier is off, and connect it to PC with download cable
B RS232C cross cable (D-sub 9pin to D-sub 9pin, or D-sub 25pin to beforehand.
D-sub 9pin)
2) Start up the maintenance program on PC. Select the model name
C Software for version-up from the model selection dialogue box.
(Target PWB)
1 MCU PWB
2 Panel PWB
3 IMC PWB
4 Finisher PWB

Outline of Update Procedure

PC
C
A
Download 3) Make sure only "Printer Control Board" tree is visible under "Simu-
data lation Command List".
RS232C connector
(9pin or 25pin)
B
RS232C cross cable
(D-sub 9pin to D-sub 9pin)
or
(D-sub 25pin to D-sub 9pin)

I/F circuit (9pin)


1
MCU-PWB

Operation IMC
Finisher
panel PWB

2 3 4
4) Turn on the copier. The machine starts up in the download mode.
5) Additional tree will be visible when downloading maintenance pro-
gram on PC.
Prepare following files necessary for program update
∗ Make sure to start up maintenance program before turn on the
• Maintenance software: maintenance.exe
machine.
• Andromeda module file: ProcModelR.mdl
• Maintenance tool driver: SFZEJENU.inf

Ready to start download process


when these trees appear.

AR-5726/5731 FIRMWARE UPDATE 9 - 1


6) When downloading copier firm, expand "Special(Copier)", and
double-click on "All Data areas Download".

7) Select download file(*.dat), and press "Open" button.

8) Download procedure starts automatically.

9) Notice message "Download is complete. Check the copier panel


to make sure the download is complete." will appear on PC.
10) Close the maintenance program, and turn off the copier. Turn on
the copier again after pulling the plug.
This is the end of download procedure.
∗ It is possible that download process somehow went wrong if the
copier does not start up properly. In that case, start up the copier
and maintenance program in download mode by repeating the step
1)-5) again. And then, Expand "Special", and double-click on "Con-
firm Error Status". If any of the message besides "No error has been
occurred" appears, it means that download is incomplete, so please
try again.

AR-5726/5731 FIRMWARE UPDATE 9 - 2


B. Others (Troubleshooting)
Followings are the error possibly occur during the download process and troubleshooting method.
No Warning/error message Detail
1 Incorrect destination. Continue with the Destination of download file and copier doesn't match.
download process? Possible to select either continue or cancel the job.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
To change destination, select "Yes". If not, select "No" and cancel download process.
2 Incorrect download file. Invalid download file for the machine is selected, or the file format is not correct.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Confirm the download file. Possibly the improper download file is selected.
3 No downloadable data included. Unable to find appropriate data in selected download file.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Confirm the download file. Possibly the improper download file is selected.
4 This option not available. Download procedure is executed on uninstalled optional kit.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Confirm installed optional kit.
Confirm the download file. Possibly the improper download file is selected.
5 The data size exceeds the Flash ROM size. Panel flash ROM size is not enough to execute download procedure.
Try again with the appropriate size of data. [TROUBLESHOOTING]
Confirm the download file. Possibly the improper download file is selected.
Exchange the flash ROM to the one which has more capacity.
6 Time out error. Transmission error
Unable to receive data from the machine among the certain period of time.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Restart maintenance program after confirming communication port or communication cable.
7 Communication (incoming) error. Incorrect download procedure.
The machine did not proceed download procedure correctly.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Restart maintenance program after confirming communication port or communication cable.
Make sure the communication device of PC(either COM or parallel) is under right condition.
8 Checksum error. Transmission error
The check sum value of the transmission data is mismatch.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Restart maintenance program after confirming communication device of PC (either COM or
parallel) is under right condition.
9 Error during the download process. Error Download data file operation error.
code: 0xXXXXXXXX [TROUBLESHOOTING]
Restart maintenance program after confirming the selected download file is not abnormal and
not using other application.
10 An error. [0xXXXXXXXX] The error occurred except the above errors.
[TROUBLESHOOTING]
Restart maintenance program after confirming communication device of PC(either COM or
parallel) is under right condition.

AR-5726/5731 FIRMWARE UPDATE 9 - 3


Plasmacluster
Mirror-Motor (Download PC with exclusive connection) Inner Finisher Unit (Optional)
RSPF Unit
Down-Load-Connector
D-Sub 9pin Paper Alignment Plate Home Position Detector F Delivery Roller Lift Motor
RSPF-SEN-PWB Paper Alignment Plate Home Position Detector R Paper Alignment Motor F
RSPF Cover Sens RSPF-Paper feed
Delivery Roller Position Detector Paper Alignment Motor R
RSPF PS Sens clutch
RSPF Paper Empty Delivery Tray Lower Limit Detector Paper Delivery Motor

INNER
RSPF Paper Out Sensor Scanner Mirror HP Delivery Tray Upper Limit Detector Paper Transport Motor
RSPF Paper Width Sens (Analog) Cover Sensor Paper Level Detector Stalpe Motor
RSPF BOOK Sens Sensor Option Paper Pass Detector Tray Lift Motor
D-Sub 25pin Connector PWB D-Sub 15pin Paper Rear Edge Detector C Rear Edge Take-up Roller Solenoid
L1
Paper Rear Edge Detector F Paper Pass Gate Solenoid

FINISHER PWB
Copy-Lamp
1. Block diagram

Paper Rear Edge Detector R Paddle Solenoid


RSPF-CNT-PWB Staple Empty Detector Control PWB Cooling Fan
L2

2nd POUT
Staple Lead Detector Stapler Cooling Fan
Defog Staple Home Position Sensor Paper Entry Gate

Sensor
Paper Size Sensor
CCD-PWB

Solenoid
Heater Staple Tray Paper Detector Safety Switch

Paper Full

Pout 2 Ssensor

Pout Gate
AB INCH

COVER SENSOR
RSPF-Motor RSPF-Pressure RSPF-DupSOL
release SOL
A. SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM

Right Tray Paper OUT Unit (Optional)


POUT2_R: Paper OUT (Right Tray) Detector
PFULL2_R: Paper Full (Right Tray) Detector
KEEPSOL1/2: KeepSolenoid (Right Tray)
Shifter
HP Except North America
Sensor CN17
[10] ELECTRICAL SECTION

CN21
Fuser Cooling Fan (x 2) Pout Sensor

CN6

CN32
CN22
CN26
CN25
CN23
CN30
CN31

(AB / INCH )
CPLD Writer
Shifter-Motor CN2 CN505
Except North America

Duplex 2 Motor
CN4 FAX PWB
Pout Cooling Fan (x 2) CN504
CN

Duplex-Motor CN1

CN7
MCU-PWB IMC PWB
Duplex Conveyance Sensor Humidity Sensor CN503 256/512MB DIMM (x 2)

Main tray Unit CN5


Duplex Paper Out Sensor
Mother PWB

PAP1H ; Paper Empty


LUD1H ; Lift Up Detector Paper Remove
PPD1H (PIN) : Paper IN Sol CN11
SPCL PWB
PCS1H ; Pick Up Solenoid
CN

2nd tray Unit (Optional)

AR-5726/5731 ELECTRICAL SECTION 10 - 1


CS interface PWB

CN8
CN3
CSS2H: Casette Detector

CN19
CN28
CN27
CN501

DRS2H: Door Detector


CN502
PPD2H: Paper Pass Detector

CN38
CN14
CN29

PAP2H: Paper Empty


CN12

LUD2H: Lift Up Detector

CN9
PCL2H: Pick Up Clutch CN15 CN18
LUM2H: Lift Up Motor
TRCLH: Vertical Transport Roller Clutch Paper Feed Motor
CN10

Multi-step tray Unit (Optional) Manual Feed Unit


CS interface PWB Main body paper feed load
HPEMPTY: HandpaperEmpty sensor DEV/CRUM Defog Heater
Paper Feed Motor HPIN: Handpaper IN Sensor TRAY PAPER (Japan Only)
MAIN-Motor InterLock SENSOR Power Unit
HPTRAY1: Handpaper TRAY Sensor 1
OP-UP tray OP-LO tray HPTRAY2: Handpaper TRAY Sensor 2 Toner-Motor Auditer I/F Coin Switch
PPD1: Paper Pass Detector PPD2: Paper Pass Detector HPSIZE1: Handpaper Size Sensor 1 Vender Front Cooling FAN
PAP1: Paper Empty PAP2: Paper Empty HPSIZE2: Handpaper Size Sensor 2 PS Cooling Fan
LUD1: Lift Up Detector LUD2: Lift Up Detector HPWS: Handpaper Width Sensor (Analog) OPERATION PANEL Power Supply
CSS1: Casette Detector CSS2: Casette Detector HPSOL: Handpaper PickUp Solenoid HVU PS-SW
DRS1: Door Detector DRS2: Door Detector LCD Main / Sub
PCL1: Pick Up Clutch CSS1H: Tray Detector WakeUp SW
PCL2: Pick Up Clutch Touch Panel
LUM1: Lift Up Motor LUM2: Lift Up Motor PSRSOL: Paper Stop Roller Sol. Polygon-Motor Reactor
TRCL: Verical transport roller PCL1H: PickUp Cluth (CE Only)
clutch 2 Key/LED PWB
LUM1H: Lift Up Motor OPU-PWB
APC-PWB BD-PWB AC
Fuser Unit LSU-PWB BD-Sensor
LSU-UN
Fuser-Lamp(x2)
Thermister (x 2 Analog)
2. Actual wiring chart
A. MCU - Panel unit, Optical base plate sensor section

CN9(52207-1885) CN1(52610-1871)
DGND 18 18 DGND

TOUCH PANEL
24V1 17 17 +24V_OP
DGND 16 16 DGND
+5V 15 15 +5V
DGND 14 14 DGND CN4(52271-0469)
+3.3V 13 13 +3.3V X2/ 1
+3.3V 12 12 +3.3V Y2/ 2
RES_OPU 11 11 RES_OPU X1 3
FPC
/CLK_OPU 10 10 /CLK_OPU Y1 4
CRDY_OPU 9 9 CRDY_OPU
SRDY_OPU 8 8 SRDY_OPU
/TXD_OPU 7 7 /TXD_OPU
/RXD_OPU 6 6 /RXD_OPU
DGND 5 5 DGND
Standby_LED 4 4 Standby_LED

OPU PWB
/WakeUp_Key 3 3 /WakeUp_Key
+5Vsub 2 2 +5Vsub
DGND 1 1 DGND

PANEL UNIT
CN2(52271-2479)
CN1(IMSA-9619S-24C-TB)

GND 24 24 GND
INFO_LED 23 23 INFO_LED
/START_KEY 22 22 /START_KEY
SENSE0 21 21 SENSE0 CN5(52746-1571) CN**(*****)
SENSE1 20 20 SENSE1 V0 1 1 V0
SENSE2 19 19 SENSE2 LP 2 2 LP
SENSE3 18 18 SENSE3 D-GND 3 3 D-GND
SENSE4 17 17 SENSE4 CP 4 4 CP
SCAN0 16 16 SCAN0 D-GND 5 5 D-GND

LCD UNIT
SCAN1 15 15 SCAN1 M 6 6 M
SCAN2 14 14 SCAN2 3.3V_EXT 7 7 3.3V_EXT
SCAN3 13 13 SCAN3 D0 8 8 D0
KEY PWB

SCAN4 12 12 SCAN4 D1 9 9 D1
/SEG0 11 11 /SEG0 D-GND 10 10 D-GND
/SEG1 10 10 /SEG1 D2 11 11 D2
/SEG2 9 9 /SEG2 D3 12 12 D3
/SEG3 8 8 /SEG3 D-GND 13 13 D-GND
COM0 7 7 COM0 DISP 14 14 DISP
COM1 6 6 COM1 VEE 15 15 VEE
COM2 5 5 COM2
/BZR_PWM 4 4 /BZR_PWM CN6
START_LED 3 3 START_LED (SM02(8.0)
5Vsub 2 2 5Vsub B-BHS-1-TB)
GND 1 1 GND CCFT+ 1
/CCFT 2
MCU PWB

AB ONLY
PAPER SIZE SENSOR
(AB ONLY)

Sub scanning side


1 LED1#
CN23(B34B-PHDSS-B) 2 LED2#
/ABJP 1 3 LED3#
DGND 2 4 5V
LED1# 3 5 DGND
LED2# 5 6 DSCLK
LED3# 7 7 DSIN0
5V 9 8 N.C
DGND 11 292250-8
DSCLK# 13
DSIN0 15
/INCHJP 17 (N.C)
DGND 18 (N.C) Main scanning side
LED1# 4 1 LED1#
LED2# 6 2 LED2#
LED3# 8 3 LED3#
OPTICAL BASE PLATE (1/2)

5V 10 4 5V
DGND 12 5 DGND
DSCLK# 14 6 DSCLK
DSIN3 16 7 DSIN0
DSIN2A 19 (N.C) 8 N.C
DSIN2B 20 (N.C) 292250-8
DGND 21 (N.C)
DGND 22 (N.C)
DSCLK# 23 (N.C)
DSCLK# 24 (N.C)
5V 25 (N.C) OC COVER SENSOR
5V 26 (N.C) 1 OC COVER
LED0# 27 (N.C) 2 DGND
LED0# 28 (N.C) 3 PULL UP
OCCOVER 29 292250-3
DGND 30
5V(PULL UP) 31 MHP SENSOR
5V(PULL UP) 32 3 PULL UP
MHP 33 2 MHP
DGND 34 1 DGND
S3B-PH-K-S

CN23(B34B-PHDSS-B)
INCH ONLY
/ABJP 1 (N.C)
DGND 2 (N.C) PAPER SIZE SENSOR
LED1# 3 (N.C) (INCH ONLY)
LED1# 4 (N.C)
Sub scanning side
LED2# 5 (N.C)
1 DSIN2A
LED2# 6 (N.C)
2 DGND
LED3# 7 (N.C)
3 DSCLK#
LED3# 8 (N.C)
4 5V
5V 9 (N.C)
5 LED0#
5V 10 (N.C)
292250-5
DGND 11 (N.C)
DGND 12 (N.C)
DSCLK# 13 (N.C)
Main scanning side
DSCLK# 14 (N.C)
1 DSIN2B
DSIN0 15 (N.C)
2 DGND
DSIN3 16 (N.C)
3 DSCLK#
/INCHJP 17
4 5V
DGND 18
5 LED0#
DSIN2A 19
292250-5
DGND 21
DSCLK# 23
5V 25
LED0# 27
DSIN2B 20
DGND 22 OC COVER SENSOR
DSCLK# 24 1 OC COVER
5V 26 2 DGND
LED0# 28 3 PULL UP
OCCOVER 29 292250-3
DGND 30
5V(PULL UP) 31 MHP SENSOR
5V(PULL UP) 32 3 PULL UP
MHP 33 2 MHP
DGND 34 1 DGND
S3B-PH-K-S

AR-5726/5731 ELECTRICAL SECTION 10 - 2


[2nd PAPER EXIT UNIT]
OPTICAL BASE PLATE(2/2) Except North America: Installed
North America: Not installed
CN1(FF4-32-S15D3-FA) CN6(FF4-32-S15D3-FA) CN21(B10B-PASK-1) 292250-3 GP1SQ73P
CCDD4 32 1 CCDD4 5V(PULL_UP) 3 3 5V(PULL_UP)
CCDD3 31 2 CCDD3 POUT2 2 1 POUT2 <2nd PAPER EXIT SENSOR>
CCDD5 30 3 CCDD5 DGND 1 2 DGND
CCDD2 29 4 CCDD2
CCDD6 28 5 CCDD6
CCDD1 27 6 CCDD1 DF3A-3P-2DS GP1SQ44S
CCDD7 26 7 CCDD7 5V 4 2 5V
CCDD0 25 8 CCDD0 PFULL2 5 3 PFULL2 <2nd PAPER FULL SENSOR>
ADSCLK 24 9 ADSCLK DGND 7 1 DGND
ADWRT 23 10 ADWRT
ADSD 22 11 ADSD
/f1 21 12 /f1 292250-2
3.3V 20 13 3.3V POUTCOV 10 1 POUTCOV <PAPER EXIT COVER OPEN/CLOSE
/SH 19 14 /SH DGND 8 2 DGND SENSOR SW>
DGND 18 15 DGND
/f2 17 16 /f2 * When right paper exit unit (option) is installed:
DGND 16 17 DGND /POUT2B_DET 6 Right paper exit door open/close sensor
DGND 15 18 DGND DGMD 9
DGND 14 19 DGND
/REFCK 13 20 /REFCK
DGND 12 21 DGND
/DATCK 11 22 /DATCK
DGND 10 23 DGND
/FR 9 24 /FR

CCD PWB
/DUMC 8 25 /DUMC
/PB 7 26 /PB CN32(B16B-PHDSS-B)
/OB 6 27 /OB N.C 7 (N.C)
5V 5 28 5V N.C 9 (N.C)
DGND 4 29 DGND N.C 11 (N.C)
12V 3 30 12V [1st PAPER EXIT UNIT]
DGND 2 31 DGND
12V 1 32 12V

<MIRROR MOTOR> Except North America: Installed


S 3B-PH-K-S GP1A71L3
CN26(IMSA-9604S-04C) 3 5V
North America: Not installed
PGND 4 1 PGND 2 SFTHP <SHIFTER HP SENSOR>
PGND 3 2 PGND 1 DGND
COPY LAMP UNIT /CL 2 3 /CL
24V 1 4 24V 5V 3
SFTHP 4
DGND 1 CZHR-03V-S CZHR-03V-S
5V(PullUp) 5 1 PullUp 3 PINK
POUT1 6 2 POUT1 2 BROWN <PAPER OUT1 SENSOR>
DGND 2 3 DGND 1 GRAY
TFANOUT 10
TFANRDY 14
PGND 13
CN906(52147-0510) TFANOUT 12
1 MIRMODA# CN902(B26B-PHDSS-B) CN31(B26B-PHDSS-B) TFANRDY 16
2 MIRMODB# MIRMO0# 1 2 MIRMO0# PGND 15
3 /MIRMODA# MIRMO2# 2 1 MIRMO2# DGND 8 (N.C) SMP-03V-NC SMR-03V-N
4 /MIRMODB# /MIRMODB# 3 4 /MIRMODB# 1 TFANOUT 1
5 24V_MIR MIRMO1# 4 3 MIRMO1# 3 TFANRDY 3 <COOLING FAN 1>
MIRMODA# 5 6 MIRMODA# 2 PGND 2
MIRMODB# 6 5 MIRMODB# <INTERNAL COOLING FAN>
DGND 7 8 DGND SMP-03V-NC SMR-03V-N
/MIRMODA# 8 7 /MIRMODA# 1 TFANOUT 1
CN904(SUB-D25) SPFWS 9 10 SPFWS 3 TFANRDY 3 <COOLING FAN 2>
1 DGND DGND 10 9 DGND 2 PGND 2
2 24V_RSPF YSPF 11 12 YSPF
3 /SPFMODB# /SPFMODB# 12 11 /SPFMODB#
4 /SPFMODA# /SPFMODA# 13 14 /SPFMODA#
5 SPFMODA# SPFMODB# 14 13 SPFMODB#
6 SELC# SPFMODA# 15 16 SPFMODA#
7 SELB# SELC# 16 15 SELC#
8 SPFPDA SELB# 17 18 SELB#
9 SPFRSOL# SELA# 18 17 SELA# CN22(S3B-PH-K-M) Green
10 SPFPSOL# SPFCLH# 19 20 SPFCLH# 24V 1
11 SPFPAPER SPFRSOL# 20 19 SPFRSOL# /PGSOL1 2

MCU PWB
<PAPER OUT GATE SL>
12 24V_RSPF SPFGSOL# 21 22 SPFGSOL# /PGSOL2 3
13 DGND SPFPSOL# 22 21 SPFPSOL#
14 PGND SPFPAPER 23 24 SPFPAPER
15 YSPF 5V 24 23 5V CN1(B5B-PAEK-1) Blue

RSPF
16 DGND PGND 25 26 PGND SW24V / SW24V_Dup 1
17 SPFMODB# 24VOP 26 25 24V1 DPXA 2
18 SPFWS DPXB 3 <DUPLEX MOTOR>

AR-5726/5731 ELECTRICAL SECTION 10 - 3


19 3.3V1 /DPXA 4
20 SELA# /DPXB 5
21 SPFCLH#
22 SPFGSOL#
23 SPFPDB CN901(B18B-PHDRS-B) CN30(B18B-PHDSS-B)
24 5V1 DGND 1 2 DGND
25 PGND 5V 2 1 5V CN2(B6B-PH-K-S)
3.3V 3 4 3.3V SW24V 1
SVSTS 4 3 SVSTS SW24V 2
DTR 5 6 DTR SFTDA# 3 <SHIFTER MOTOR>
CN905(SUB-D15) CTS 6 5 CTS SFTDB# 4
B. MCU - Optical base plate 2, OP I/F PWB, 1st paper exit unit, 2nd paper exit unit

1 PGND SVCMD 7 8 SVCMD /SFTDA# 5 Except North America: Installed


2 24V_FN RTS 8 7 RTS /SFTDB# 6
3 /FINCRDY DSR 9 10 DSR North America: Not installed
4 FINSTS /FINCRDY 10 9 /FINCRDY#
5 /RESET# /FINSRDY 11 12 /FINSRDY
6 FINPIN FINSTS 12 11 FINSTS#

OP I/F PWB
7 24V_FN FINCMD 13 14 FINCMD CN4(B5B-PH-K-R) Red
8 PGND /RESET# 14 13 /RESET# SW24V 1
9 DGND FINPIN 15 16 /MSFINDET DUP2MODA# 2
10 3.3V1 /FINDET 16 15 /FINDET DUP2MODB# 3

FINISHER
<DUPLEX 2 MOTOR>
11 /FINSRDY PGND 17 18 PGND /DUP2MODA# 4
12 FINCMD 24VOP 18 17 24V1 /DUP2MODB# 5
13 5V1
14 /FINDET
15 DGND

CN903(SUB-D9)
1 N.C
2 SVCMDX
3 SVSTSX
4 DTRX
5 DGND
6 DSRX
7 RTSX
8 CTSX
9 N.C

RIC / DOWNLOAD/ PCI


[HAND PAPER (MANUAL FEED) UNIT]
SMP-02V-NC SMR-02V-N
1 1
<HAND PAPER
24V
2 /HPSOL 2 SOLENOID>

292250-2
1 HPTRAY1 <HAND PAPER TRAY 1>
HARNESS GUIDE 2 DGND

BU15P-TR-P-H 292250-2
15 24V 1 1 HPTRAY2
14 /HPSOL 2 2 DGND
<HAND PAPER TRAY 2>
13 HPTRAY1 3
12 DGND 4
11 HPTRAY2 5
10 DGND 6 292250-3
9 HPSIZE1 7 1 HPSIZE1
8 DGND 8 2 DGND <HAND PAPER PICK SIZE SENSOR 1>
CN15(B36B-PUDSS-1) 7 PULL UP 9 3 PULL UP
24V 5 6 HPSIZE2 10
/HPSOL 7 5 DGND 11
4 PULL UP 12 292250-3
HPTRAY1 9 3 3.3V 13 1 HPSIZE2
DGND 11 2 HPWS 14 2 DGND <HAND PAPER SIZE SENSOR 2>
HPTRAY2 13 1 DGND 15 3 PULL UP
DGND 15 PHNR-15-H PHNR-15-H
HPSIZE1 17
DGND 19 S 3B-PH-K-S
5V(PULL UP) 21 1 3.3V
HPSIZE2 23 2 HPWS <HAND PAPER WIDTH SENSOR>
DGND 25 3 DGND
C. Manual feed, 1st tray unit section

5V(PULL UP) 27
3.3V 29
HPWS 31
DGND 33
DGND 10 BU03P-TR-P-H S 3B-PH-K-S
DUP2SEN 12 1 DGND 3 1 DGND
5V(PULL UP) 14 2 DUP2SEN 2 2 DUP2SEN <DUPLEX 2 SENSOR PWB>
3 PULL UP 1 3 PULL UP
PHNR-3-H PHNR-3-H
5V 32 (N.C)
PPSEN 34 (N.C)
DGND 35 (N.C)
DGND 36 (N.C)

SMP-03V-NC SMR-03V-N
24V 3 1 24V 1
PSRSOL/ 4 2 N.C 2 <PAPER STOP ROLLER CLUCH>
3 /PSRSOL 3

SMP-02V-BC BLACK SMR-02V-B


/PCL1H 2 1 /PCL1H 1 <PAPER FEED CLUCH>
24V 1 2 24V 2

LIFT UP MOTORUN PLATE


MAIN FRAME [LIFT UP MOTOR UNIT]
B 3B-PH-K-S
/LUM1H 6 1 /LUM1H
PGND 8 2 N.C
3 PGND

BU04P-TR-P-H
1 /HPIN 4 292250-3 VHPSG2481++-1
/HPIN 26 2 N.C 3 1 /HPIN
DGND 28 3 DGND 2 2 DGND <HAND PAPER IN
5V(PULL UP) 30 4 PULL UP 1 3 PULL UP
HPEMPTY 16 PHNR-4-H PHNR-4-H
SENSOR PWB>
DGND 18
5V(PULL UP) 20 BU05P-TR-P-H 292250-3 VHPSG2481++-1
CSS1H 22 1 HPEMPTY 5 1 /HPEMPTY <HAND PAPER

MCU PWB
DGND 24 2 DGND 4 2 DGND
3 PULL UP 3 3 PULL UP EMPTY SENSOR PWB>
4 CSS1H 2

AR-5726/5731 ELECTRICAL SECTION 10 - 4


5 DGND 1
PHNR-5-H PHNR-5-H

[1st TRAY UNIT]


292250-2
1 CSS1H <CASETTE SENSOR SW (TRAY DETECTION)>
2 DGND
[1st TRAY UNIT]

SMR-02V-N SMP-02V-NC
1 24V 1
2 /PCS1H 2 <PAPER FEED SOLENOID>

CN14(B8B-PH-K-S)
24V 1
/PCS1H 2 B 6B-PH-K-S
DGND 3 1 DGND <PAPER PATH SENSOR>
/PIN 4 2 /PIN <PAPER EMPTY SENSOR>
5V 5 3 5V <PAPER UPPER LIMIT SENSOR>
<TRAY SENSOR PWB>
/PAP1H 6 4 /PAP1H
N.C 7 (N.C) 5 N.C
/LUD1H 8 6 /LUD1H
D. 2nd tray unit section

CN38(B28B-PUDSS-1) CN5(B28B-PUDSS-1) CN9(B24B-PUDSS-1)


PGND 1 1 PGND PGND 1
24V 2 2 24V 24V 2
5V 3 3 5V 5V 3
24V 4 4 24V 24V 4
PCS1A# 5 5 PCS2# LUM4# 5
LUM1A# 6 6 LUM2# PCS4# 6
TRCLA# 7 7 TRCL2# Y3 7
PCL1A# 8 8 PCL2# PCL4# 8
PCS2# 9 9 PCS4# Y4 9
LUM2# 10 10 LUM4# LUM3# 10
PCL2# 11 11 PCL4# TRCL3# 11
Y1B 12 12 Y3 CSSELA# 12
LUM1B# 13 13 LUM3# PCS3# 13
Y2 14 14 Y4 CSSELB# 14
CSSELA# 15 15 CSSELA# PCL3# 15
TRCLB# 16 16 TRCL3# CSSELC# 16
CSSELB# 17 17 CSSELB# BI# 17
PCS1B#
CSSELC#
18
19
18
19
PCS3#
CSSELC#
AI#
/BI#
18
19
Option Tray I/F PWB
PCL1B# 20 20 PCL3# /AI# 20
AI# 21 21 AI# OPCASSEL# 21
BI# 22 22 BI# DGND 22
/AI# 23 23 /AI# DGND 23
/BI# 24 24 /BI# DGND 24
MCU PWB
Y1A 25 25 Y2
OPCASSEL# 26 26 OPCASSEL#
DGND 27 27 DGND
DGND 28 28 DGND

Standard Tray I/F PWB


[2nd TRAY UNIT]
CN3(B3B-PH-K-S)
/PCL2 1
N.C 2 <PAPER FEED CL>
24V 3

CN2(B3B-PH-K-K) Black
/TRCL2 1
N.C 2 (N.C) <VERTICAL TRANSPORT ROLLER CL>
24V 3

TRAY SENSOR PWB


CN8(B8B-PH-K-S) B 6B-PH-K-S B 3B-PH-K-S
DGND 1 1 DGND DRS2 1 292250-2
PPD2 2 2 PPD2 N.C 2 1 DRS2 <DOOR OPEN/CLOSE
5V 3 3 5V DGND 3 2 D-GND SENSOR SW>
PAP2 4 4 PAP2
DRS2 5 5 DRS2
LUD2 6 6 LUD2
/PCS2 7 <PAPER PATH SENSOR>
24V 8 <PAPER EMPTY SENSOR>
<PAPER UPPER LIMIT SENSOR>
SMR-02V-N SMP-02V-NC
1 /PCS2 1 <PAPER FEED SL>
2 24V 2

CN7(B3B-PH-K-E) Blue
CSS2 1 292250-2
N.C 2 1 CSS2 <TRAY SENSOR SW>
DGND 3 2 DGND

CN1(B3B-PH-K-R) Red B 3B-PH-K-S


LUM2D 1 1 LUM2D [LIFT UP MOTOR UNIT]
N.C 2 2 N.C
PGND 3 3 PGND

AR-5726/5731 ELECTRICAL SECTION 10 - 5


[POWER SUPPLY UNIT]

CN20(B10B-PH-K-S)
1 24VOP
(N.C) 2 24VOP
(N.C) 3 24VOP
(N.C) 4 +3.3V
5 +5V
6 D-GND LVPS PWB (1/2)
7 D-GND
(N.C) 8 P-GND
(N.C) 9 P-GND
10 P-GND

CN12(B10B-PASK-1) CN1(B11B-PH-K-S)
DGND 1 9 DGND #187(B1)[RD]
SW24V 2 11 SW24V MHV - MHV SOKET
TCDA# 3 3 TCDA#
DHVREM/ 4 4 DHVREM CN21(B2P-VH_BL_Blue)
THV-REM/ 5 6 THV-REM MCCASE 1
DVBSPWM/ 6 8 DVBSPWM N.C 2 MCCASE
MHVREM/ 7 1 MHVREM
THVREM 8 5 THVREM CN101(B2P-VH_White)
GBPWM/ 9 2 GBPWM GB 1
DVBSREM/ 10 7 DVBSREM N.C 2 GB
(N.C) 10 N.C
#187(B201)[WH]
THV - - THV
TC HIGH VOLTAGE
CN301(B2P-VH_BK_Black)
DHV 1 - DHV
HOLDER
E. Fusing unit, Power supply unit section

HV PWB
N.C 2

CN401(B2P-VH_RD_Red)
DVBS 1 (To DV & LSU unit section)
CN10(B30B-PUDSS-1) GND 2
24V1 11
P-GND 5
D-GND 14
CN19(S7B-PH-K-S) D-GND 16 CN101(B30B-PNDZS-1)
+12V 21 1 +12V
3.3Vsub 28 3 Sub3.3V
+3.3V 22 5 +3.3V

MCU PWB
RTH1
RTH2

PDPX
DGND
DGND
DGND

5V(PullUp)
+3.3V 20 7 +3.3V
+5V 18 9 +5V

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
D-GND 30 11 D-GND
D-GND 26 13 D-GND
D-GND 2 19 D-GND
[FUSING UNIT] +24V 3 21 +24V
P-GND 8 23 P-GND
/PR 9 25 /PR
FW 13 27 FW
POFFR# 15 29 P-OFF
<DUPLEX PAPER OUT SENSOR> 5Vsub 25 2 Sub5V
292250-3 BU03P-TR-P-H 3.3Vsub 27 4 Sub3.3V
5V(PullUp) 3 1 5V(PullUp) 3 +3.3V 24 6 +3.3V CN2(B03P-VL-R) PS-250
White
DGND 2 2 DGND 2 +5V 17 8 +5V AC-NEUT OUT 3 SW OUT (NEUTRAL) 1
PDPX 1 3 PDPX 1 D-GND 29 10 D-GND N.C 2 PS-250
Black
RHNR-3-H RHNR-3-H D-GND 23 12 D-GND AC-LIVE OUT 1 SW OUT (LIVE) 1
D-GND 19 14 D-GND
D-GND 1 16 D-GND <AC SW>
+24VINT 6 18 +24VINT CN3(B03P-VL-B) PS-250-R (RED)
BU04P-TR-P-H +24VINT 4 20 +24VINT AC-LIVE IN 1 Black SW IN (LIVE) 1
1 RTH1 4 P-GND 7 22 P-GND N.C 2 PS-250-R (RED)
White SW IN (NEUTRAL) 1
2 DGND 3 HLOUT2 12 28 HLOUT2 AC-NEUT IN 3
3 RTH2 2 HLOUT1 10 30 HLOUT1
4 DGND 1 (N.C) 15 D-GND CN102(B3B-PH-K-S)
RHNR-4-H RHNR-4-H (N.C) 17 D-GND /PSFAN 1 (N.C)
(N.C) 24 P-GND N.C 2 (N.C)
(N.C) 26 FAN-C GND 3 (N.C)

AR-5726/5731 ELECTRICAL SECTION 10 - 6


CN1(B03P-VL)
LIVE 1
THERMISTER 1 N.C 2
NEUTRAL 3

FGND
THERMISTER 2

THERMOSTAT 2 THERMOSTAT 1

CN1(B03P-VL) 200V only


LIVE 1 Brown
N.C 2

HARNESS GUIDE
NEUTRAL 3 White
VLP-02V VLR-02V CN5(B2P-VL)
HEATER LAMP 1 (CENTER) 1 LIVE1 1 1 LIVE1
2 HL-OUTPUT1 2 2 LIVE2 FGND
LVPS PWB (2/2)
CN6(B2P3-VH)
VLP-03V VLR-03V 1 HL-OUTPUT1
1 LIVE2 1 2 N.C
2 N.C 2 3 HL-OUTPUT2
3 HL-OUTPUT2 3

HEATER LAMP 2 (SIDE)


SMR-03V-N SMP-03V-NC CN29(B6B-PH-K-S)
1 /PSFANOUT 1 6 /PSFANOUT
<PS FAN 1 (SIDE)> 3 PSFANRDY 3 5 PSFANRDY
2 PGND 2 4 PGND

SMR-03V-N SMP-03V-NC
1 /PSFANOUT 1 3 /PSFANOUT
<PS FAN 2 (FRONT)> 3 PSFANRDY 3 2 PSFANRDY
2 PGND 2 1 PGND

<MAIN MOTOR>
CN8(B5B-PH-K-S) (B5B-PH-K-S)
SW24V 5 1 SW24V
CN502(B14B-PUDSS-1) PGND 4 2 PGND
(N.C) 10 OZNFANOUT /MMD 3 3 /MMD
(N.C) 12 OZNFANRDY /MMRDY 2 4 /MMRDY
(N.C) 14 PGND /MMCLK 1 5 /MMCLK
13 DGND
11 TRAY PAPER
F. DV & LSU unit section

9 5V(PULL UP)

GP1S73P BU03P-TR-P-H
DGND 2 1 DGND 3
TRAY PAPER 1 2 TRAY PAPER 2 CN3(B2P-VH)
PULL UP 3 3 PULL UP 1 TMD 1
PHNR-3-H PHNR-3-H /TMD 2 <TONNER MOTOR>
<PAPER EXIT TRAY SENSOR>

<PAPER EXIT TRAY UNIT>

(To HV PWB)

51010-0811 52025-0811
8 DVBS 8
7 N.C 7
6 DGND 6
5 DEV 5
4 N.C 4
3 N.C 3
TCS 2 TONER 2
1 24V 1 2 DGND
4 DEV CN504(B06B-CZHK-B-1) CK03-6H-P
6 TONER /POUTFANOUT 6 3 POUTFANOUT 1
(TSHP-04V-K) (THSR-04V-K) 8 24V POUTFANRDY 5 2 POUTFANRDY 2
4 DGND 4 1 DGND PGND 4 1 PGND 3 <POUT FAN 1>
3 3 3 3

MCU PWB
5V 5V /POUTFANOUT
CRUM PWB 2 DEVCLK# 2 5 DEVCLK# POUTFANRDY 2
1 DEVID# 1 7 DEVID# PGND 1
CK03-6H-P 31 CPM model only
3 POUTFANOUT 1
2 POUTFANRDY 2
1 PGND 3 <POUT FAN 2>

CN18(B03P-VH) SMP-03V-NC SMR-03V-N Soldering


24VINT 1 1 24VINT 1 24VINT
PGND 2 (N.C) 2 N.C 2 Soldering ILSW <INTERLOCK SW>
SW24V 3 3 SW24V 3 SW24V

AR-5726/5731 ELECTRICAL SECTION 10 - 7


LSU UNIT
CN11(B4B-PH-K-K)BLACK SMP-02V-NC SMR-02V-N
24V 1 1 24V 1
/PREMSOL 2 2 DGND 2 <SEPARATION PAWL SOLENOID>
N.C 3 (N.C)
CN501(B13B-PASK-1) DGND 4 (N.C)
B10B-PH-K-S BU12P-TR-P-H 1 SW5V
SW5V 4 1 SW5V 12 (N.C) 2 DGND
/SYNC 5 2 /PMRDY 11 3 /PMRDY (S4B-ZR-SM3A-TF)
/VIDEO 6 3 /VIDEO 10 4 /VIDEO CN503(B4B-PH-K-S)
/SAMP 7 4 /SAMP 9 5 /SAMP 5V 1 1 5V
APCSTT# 8 5 APCSTT 8 6 APCSTT EHUD# 2 2 EHUD# <TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR>
APC DGND 9 6 DGND 7 7 DGND DGND 3 3 DGND
LPSEL 10 7 LPSEL 6 8 LPSEL ERTH 4 4 ERTH
SW5V 3 8 /PMCLK 5 9 /PMCLK
/SYNC 2 9 /SYNC 4 10 /SYNC
DGND 1 10 /PMD 3 11 /PMD
11 PGND 2 12 PGND
12 24V 1 13 24V
PHNR-12-H PHNR-12-H

B3B-PH-K-S
DGND 3
BPC /SYNC 2
SW5V 1

177622-5
/PMCLK 1
/PMRDY 2
PM PWB /PMD 3
PGND 4
24V 5
G. Board to board section
CN3(TX24-60R-12ST-H1) CN5(TX25-60R-12ST-H1E) CN7(TX25-60P-12ST-H1E)
3.3VSub 1 1 3.3VSub 5V 1
3.3VSub 2 2 3.3VSub 5V 2
24V 3 3 24V 3.3V 3
DGND 4 4 DGND 3.3V 4
DGND 5 5 DGND /MRESET 5
/SCLINE 6 6 /SCLINE /PWOFF 6
/READY 7 7 /READY /PRLINE 7
5V 8 8 5V /HSYNC 8

Board to Board Connector

Board to Board Connector


GDATA1 9 9 GDATA1 DGND 9
GDATA3 10 10 GDATA3 DGND 10
GDATA5 11 11 GDATA5 DGND 11
GDATA7 12 12 GDATA7 N.C 12
GDATA9 13 13 GDATA9 /ESPAGE 13
GDATA11 14 14 GDATA11 ESCMD 14
GDATA13 15 15 GDATA13 /ESCRDY 15
GDATA15 16 16 GDATA15 DGND 16
/PRINTERWU 17 17 /PRINTERWU GDATA0 17

MCU PWB
/PCLDET 18 18 /PCLDET GDATA2 18

IMC PWB
PCLSTS 19 19 PCLSTS GDATA4 19
/PCLSRDY 20 20 /PCLSRDY GDATA6 20
/PCLREQ1P 21 21 /PCLREQ1P GDATA8 21
/PCLCS1P 22 22 /PCLCS1P GDATA10 22
/PCLREQ0P 23 23 /PCLREQ0P GDATA12 23
/PCLCS0P 24 24 /PCLCS0P GDATA14 24
/FAXDET 25 25 /FAXDET N.C 25
FAXSTS 26 26 FAXSTS /ESACK1P 26
/FAXSRDY 27 27 /FAXSRDY N.C 27
/FAXREQ0P 28 28 /FAXREQ0P /ESPRD 28
/FAXCS0P 29 29 /FAXCS0P /ESACK0P 29
3.3V 30 30 3.3V DGND 30
5Vsub 31 31 5Vsub 5V 31
EXTRS 32 32 EXTRS 5V 32
GND 33 33 GND 3.3V 33
GND 34 34 GND 3.3V 34
/MRESET 35 35 /MRESET N.C 35
/PWOFF 36 36 /PWOFF N.C 36
/PRLINE 37 37 /PRLINE /SCLINE 37

MOTHER PWB
/HSYNC 38 38 /HSYNC /READY 38
/PSSTS 39 39 /PSSTS DGND 39
GDATA0 40 40 GDATA0 DGND 40
GDATA2 41 41 GDATA2 DGND 41
GDATA4 42 42 GDATA4 N.C 42
GDATA6 43 43 GDATA6 /ESDET 43
GDATA8 44 44 GDATA8 ESSTS 44
GDATA10 45 45 GDATA10 /ESSRDY 45
GDATA12 46 46 GDATA12 DGND 46
GDATA14 47 47 GDATA14 GDATA1 47
/FAXWU 48 48 /FAXWU GDATA3 48
/GDIDET 49 49 /GDIDET GDATA5 49
PCLCMD 50 50 PCLCMD GDATA7 50
/PCLCRDY 51 51 /PCLCRDY GDATA9 51
/PCLPRD 52 52 /PCLPRD GDATA11 52
/PCLACK1P 53 53 /PCLACK1P GDATA13 53
/PCLACK0P 54 54 /PCLACK0P GDATA15 54
/FAXPAGE 55 55 /FAXPAGE N.C 55
FAXCMD 56 56 FAXCMD /ESREQ1P 56
/FAXCRDY 57 57 /FAXCRDY /ESCS1P 57
/FAXPRD 58 58 /FAXPRD /ESREQ0P 58
/FAXACK0P 59 59 /FAXACK0P /ESCS0P 59
3.3V 60 60 3.3V DGND 60

CN**(TX25-60P-12ST-H1) CN1(TX25-60P-12ST-H1) CN**(TX24-60R-12ST-H1)


1 5Vsub 24V 1 1 24V
2 5Vsub 24V 2 2 24V
3 3.3Vsub 5V 3 3 5V
4 3.3Vsub 5V 4 4 5V
5 /RESET 3.3V 5 5 3.3V
6 /PWOFF 3.3V 6 6 3.3V
7 /PRLINE /RESET 7 7 /RESET
8 /HSYNC /PWOFF 8 8 /PWOFF
9 GND /PRLINE 9 9 /PRLINE
10 GND /HSYNC 10 10 /HSYNC
11 GND GND 11 11 GND
12 GND GND 12 12 GND
Board to Board Connector

Board to Board Connector

13 /PCLPAGE /FAXPAGE 13 13 /FAXPAGE


14 PCLCMD FAXCMD 14 14 FAXCMD
15 /PCLCRDY /FAXCRDY 15 15 /FAXCRDY
SPCL PWB

16 GND GND 16 16 GND


17 GDATA0 GDATA0 17 17 GDATA0
18 GDATA2 GDATA2 18 18 GDATA2
19 GDATA4 GDATA4 19 19 GDATA4
20 GDATA6 GDATA6 20 20 GDATA6
FAX PWB

21 GDATA8 GDATA8 21 21 GDATA8


22 GDATA10 GDATA10 22 22 GDATA10
23 GDATA12 GDATA12 23 23 GDATA12
24 GDATA14 GDATA14 24 24 GDATA14
25 GND GND 25 25 GND
26 /PCLPRD /FAXPRD 26 26 /FAXPRD
27 /PCLACK1P /FAXACK1P 27 27 /FAXACK1P
28 GND GND 28 28 GND
29 /PCLACK0P /FAXACK0P 29 29 /FAXACK0P
30 GND GND 30 30 GND
31 5Vsub 24V 31 31 24V
32 5Vsub 24V 32 32 24V
33 3.3Vsub 5V 33 33 5V
34 3.3V 5Vsub 34 34 5Vsub
35 /PRINTWU 3.3V 35 35 3.3V
36 PSSTS 3.3V 36 36 3.3V
37 /SCLINE EXTRS 37 37 EXTRS
38 /READY FAXWU 38 38 FAXWU
39 GND /SCLINE 39 39 /SCLINE
40 GND /READY 40 40 /READY
41 GND GND 41 41 GND
42 NC GND 42 42 GND
43 /PCLDET /FAXDET 43 43 /FAXDET
44 PCLSTS FAXSTS 44 44 FAXSTS
45 /PCLSRDY /FAXSRDY 45 45 /FAXSRDY
46 GND GND 46 46 GND
47 GDATA1 GDATA1 47 47 GDATA1
48 GDATA3 GDATA3 48 48 GDATA3
49 GDATA5 GDATA5 49 49 GDATA5
50 GDATA7 GDATA7 50 50 GDATA7
51 GDATA9 GDATA9 51 51 GDATA9
52 GDATA11 GDATA11 52 52 GDATA11
53 GDATA13 GDATA13 53 53 GDATA13
54 GDATA15 GDATA15 54 54 GDATA15
55 GND GND 55 55 GND
56 /PCLREQ1P /FAXREQ1P 56 56 /FAXREQ1P CN9(B3B-PH-K-S)
57 /PCLCS1P /FAXCS1P 57 57 /FAXCS1P SP+ 1
SPEAKER

58 /PCLREQ0P /FAXREQ0P 58 58 /FAXREQ0P SP- 2


59 /PCLCS0P /FAXCS0P 59 59 /FAXCS0P N.C 3
60 GND GND 60 60 GND

AR-5726/5731 ELECTRICAL SECTION 10 - 8


3. Signal list
Connector level Connector
Signal name Name Function/Operation Pin No. PWB name NOTE
“L” “H” No.
CL Copy lamp Controls ON/OFF of the ON OFF CN26 3 MCU
copy lamp.
CLH RSPF clutch Controls ON/OFF of the ON OFF CN5 13 RSPF
RSPF paper feed roller. interface
COVER RSPF cover open/close Detects open/close of OPEN CLOSE CN5 2 RSPF
detection the RSPF cover. interface
CSS1 Tray 1 installation detection Detects installation of NO YES CN15 22 MCU
tray 1.
CSS2 Tray 2 installation detection Detects installation of NO YES CN7 1 Standard
tray 2. tray I/F
CSS3 Tray 3 installation detection Detects installation of NO YES CN7 1 Option tray
tray 3. I/F
CSS4 Tray 4 installation detection Detects installation of NO YES CN4 8 Option tray
tray 4. I/F
DPX Duplex motor Controls the duplex – – CN1 2,3,4,5 MCU
motor.
DRS2 Door open/close detection Detects door open/close. OPEN CLOSE CN8 5 Standard
(Tray 2) tray I/F
DRS3 Door open/close detection Detects door open/close. OPEN CLOSE CN8 5 Option tray
(Tray 3) I/F
DRS4 Door open/close detection Detects door open/close. OPEN CLOSE CN4 5 Option tray
(Tray 4) I/F
DUP2SEN DUP2 paper delivery sensor Detects paper delivery in YES NO CN15 12 MCU
the reverse path.
EHUD Humidity sensor Senses the humidity. – – CN503 2 MCU Analog
detection
ERTH Temperature sensor Senses the temperature. – – CN503 4 MCU Analog
detection
GSOL Gate solenoid Reverses the paper exit ON OFF CN4 2 RSPF
gate in ON operation. interface
HLOUT1 Heater lamp main Turns ON/OFF the OFF ON CN10 10 MCU
heater lamp main.
HLOUT2 Heater lamp sub Turns ON/OFF the OFF ON CN10 12 MCU
heater lamp sub.
HPEMPTY Manual feed paper presence Detects presence of YES NO CN15 16 MCU
detection paper for manual paper
feed.
HPIN Manual feed paper entry Detects paper entry for NO YES CN15 26 MCU
detection manual feed.
HPSIZE1 Manual feed paper length Detects the length of NO YES CN15 17 MCU
detection manual feed paper.
HPSIZE2 Manual feed paper size Detects the size of NO YES CN15 23 MCU
detection manual feed paper.
(Longitudinal direction) (longitudinal direction)
HPSOL Manual paper feed solenoid Controls the manual ON OFF CN15 7 MCU
paper feed solenoid.
HPTRAY1 Manual paper feed tray Detects the length of LONG SHORT CN15 9 MCU
length detection manual feed tray paper.
HPTRAY2 Manual paper feed tray Detects the length of SHORT LONG CN15 13 MCU
length detection manual feed tray paper.
HPWS Manual feed paper width Detects the width of – – CN15 31 MCU
detection manual feed paper.
KEEPSOL Right paper exit gate Drives the right paper ON OFF CN17 8,9 MCU
solenoid exit gate solenoid.
LUD1H Lift-up motor upper limit Detects the upper limit of Not Detected CN14 8 MCU
detection the lift-up motor. detected
LUD2 Lift-up motor upper limit Detects the upper limit of Not Detected CN8 6 Standard
detection (Tray 2) the lift-up motor. detected tray I/F
LUD3 Lift-up motor upper limit Detects the upper limit of Not Detected CN8 6 Option tray
detection (Tray 3) the lift-up motor. detected I/F
LUD4 Lift-up motor upper limit Detects the upper limit of Not Detected CN4 6 Option tray
detection (Tray 4) the lift-up motor. detected I/F
LUM1H Lift-up motor Drives the lift plate of the OFF ON CN15 6 MCU
paper tray.

AR-5726/5731 ELECTRICAL SECTION 10 - 9


Connector level Connector
Signal name Name Function/Operation Pin No. PWB name NOTE
“L” “H” No.
LUM2D Lift-up motor Drives the lift plate of the OFF ON CN1 1 Standard
paper tray. tray I/F
LUM3D Lift-up motor Drives the lift plate of the OFF ON CN1 1 Option tray
paper tray. I/F
LUM4D Lift-up motor Drives the lift plate of the OFF ON CN4 14 Option tray
paper tray. I/F
MHP Mirror home position sensor Corrects the initial Other Home CN23 33 MCU
position of the scanner. than position
home
position.
MIRMOD Mirror motor Controls the mirror – – CN906 1,2,3,4 OP I/F PWB
operation.
MMD Main motor Controls the main motor. ON OFF IC215 3 MCU
MMRDY Main motor lock Detects lock of the main Rotation Lock IC215 2 MCU
motor.
OCCOVER OC cover open/close Detects open/close of OPEN CLOSE CN23 29 MCU
detection the OC cover.
OZNFANOUT Ozone fan Controls the ozone fan. OFF ON CN502 10 MCU
PAP1H Paper pass sensor (Tray 1) Detects paper pass. YES NO CN14 6 MCU
PAP2 Paper pass sensor (Tray 2) Detects paper pass. YES NO CN8 4 Standard
tray I/F
PAP3 Paper pass sensor (Tray 3) Detects paper pass. YES NO CN8 4 Option tray
I/F
PAP4 Paper pass sensor (Tray 4) Detects paper pass. YES NO CN4 4 Option tray
I/F
PAPER Paper entry sensor Detects paper entry. YES NO CN5 18 SPF
interface
PCL1H Paper feed clutch (Tray 1) Controls ON/OFF of the ON OFF CN15 2 MCU
paper feed roller.
PCL2 Paper feed clutch (Tray 2) Controls ON/OFF of the ON OFF CN3 1 Standard
paper feed roller. tray I/F
PCL3 Paper feed clutch (Tray 3) Controls ON/OFF of the ON OFF CN3 1 Option tray
paper feed roller. I/F
PCL4 Paper feed clutch (Tray 4) Controls ON/OFF of the ON OFF CN4 10 Option tray
paper feed roller. I/F
PCS1H Paper feed solenoid (Tray 1) Controls ON/OFF of the ON OFF CN14 2 MCU
paper feed roller.
PCS2 Paper feed solenoid (Tray 2) Controls ON/OFF of the ON OFF CN8 7 Standard
paper feed roller. tray I/F
PCS3 Paper feed solenoid (Tray 3) Controls ON/OFF of the ON OFF CN8 7 Option tray
paper feed roller. I/F
PCS4 Paper feed solenoid (Tray 4) Controls ON/OFF of the ON OFF CN4 12 Option tray
paper feed roller. I/F
PDPX Duplex sensor Detects paper presence YES NO CN19 3 MCU
for duplex.
PFULL2 No. 2 paper exit full sensor Detects paper full in the YES NO CN21 5 MCU
No. 2 paper exit unit.
PFULL2_R Right paper exit full sensor Detects paper full in the YES NO CN17 5 MCU
right paper exit unit.
PGSOL Paper exit gate solenoid Controls the paper exit ON OFF CN22 2,3 MCU
gate.
PIN Paper entry sensor Detects paper entry. YES NO CN14 4 MCU
POUT1 No. 1 paper exit sensor Detects paper exit of the NO YES CN32 6 MCU
No. 1 paper exit unit.
POUT2 No. 2 paper exit sensor Detects paper exit of the YES NO CN21 2 MCU
No. 2 paper exit unit.
POUT2_R Right paper exit sensor Detects paper exit of the YES NO CN17 2 MCU
right paper exit unit.
POUTCOV Paper exit cover open/close Detects open/close of OPEN CLOSE CN21 10 MCU
detection the paper exit cover.
POUTFANOUT Paper exit cooling fan Cools the fusing unit. OFF ON CN504 3,6 MCU
POUTFANRDY Paper exit cooling fan lock Detects lock of the paper Rotation Lock CN504 2,5 MCU
detection exit cooling fan.
PPD2 Paper pass sensor (Tray 2) Detects paper pass. YES NO CN8 2 Standard
tray I/F

AR-5726/5731 ELECTRICAL SECTION 10 - 10


Connector level Connector
Signal name Name Function/Operation Pin No. PWB name NOTE
“L” “H” No.
PPD3 Paper pass sensor (Tray 3) Detects paper pass. YES NO CN8 2 Option tray
I/F
PPD4 Paper pass sensor (Tray 4) Detects paper pass. YES NO CN4 2 Option tray
I/F
PREMSOL Paper separation solenoid Controls the paper ON OFF CN11 2 MCU
separation solenoid.
PSFANOUT PS fan Drives the PS fan. OFF ON CN29 3,6 MCU
PSFANRDY PS fan lock detection Detects lock of the PS Rotation Lock CN29 2,5 MCU
fan.
PSOL PS solenoid Controls ON/OFF of the ON OFF CN5 11 SPF
PS roller. interface
PSRSOL Resist roller solenoid Controls the resist roller. ON OFF CN15 4 MCU
RSOL Reverse solenoid Reverses the paper exit ON OFF CN5 15 SPF
gate in ON operation. interface
PWB
RTH1 Thermister 1 Detects the fusing – – CN19 4 MCU
temperature.
RTH2 Thermister 2 Detects the fusing – – CN19 6 MCU
temperature.
SFTD Shifter motor Offsets paper. – – CN2 3,4,5,6 MCU
SFTHP Shifter home position sensor Detects the home Other Home CN32 4 MCU
position of the shifter. than position
home
position.
SPFOPEN SPF cover open/close Detects open/close of OPEN CLOSE CN5 24 SPF
sensor the SPF cover. interface
SPFOUT SPF paper exit sensor Detects paper exit of the YES NO CN3 1 SPF
SPF. interface
SPFWS SPF document width Detects SFP documents. – – CN2 9 SPF Analog
detection interface detection
TFANOUT Fusing fan Drives the fusing fan. OFF ON CN32 10,12 MCU
TFANRDY Fusing fan lock detection Detects lock of the fusing Rotation Lock CN32 14,16 MCU
fan.
TMD Toner motor Controls the toner motor. – – CN3 1,2 MCU
TONER Toner sensor Detects the toner – – CN502 6 MCU Analog
density. detection
TRCL2 Vertical transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the ON OFF CN2 1 Standard
vertical transport roller. tray I/F
TRCL3 Vertical transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the ON OFF CN2 1 Option tray
vertical transport clutch. I/F
W0 Paper empty sensor Detects paper empty. YES NO CN5 1 SPF
interface

AR-5726/5731 ELECTRICAL SECTION 10 - 11


COPYRIGHT © 2009 BY SHARP CORPORATION
All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.

Trademark acknowledgements
Microsoft ® Windows ® operating system is a trademark or copyright of Microsoft
Corporation in the U. S.A. and other countries.
Windows® 95, Windows® 98, Windows ® Me, Windows NT ® 4.0, Windows ® 2000,
Windows ® XP, Windows ® Vista, Windows ® 2000 Server, Windows ® Server 2003
and Internet Explorer® are trademarks or copyrights of Microsoft Corporation in the
U.S.A. and other countries.
IBM and PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
Acrobat ® Reader Copyright ® 1987 -2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights
reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks
of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.

SHARP CORPORATION
Business Solutions Group
CS Promotion Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2009 November Printed in Japan

You might also like